Fostex Vf80 Users Manual 01Cover_page (80E)

VF80 to the manual a5212862-ddad-4de8-a004-d44570433bef

2015-02-02

: Fostex Fostex-Vf80-Users-Manual-428075 fostex-vf80-users-manual-428075 fostex pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 144 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Digital Multitracker

Owner’s Manual

8588 011 000

(356698)

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

Safety Instructions/Precautions

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER - SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

9. Heat - The appliance should be situated away from heat sources

such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances

(including amplifiers) that produce heat.

10. Power Sources - The appliance should be connected to a power

supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or

as marked on the appliance.

11. Grounding or Polarization - The precautions that should be taken

so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is

not defeated.

12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be routed

so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items

placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords

at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they

exit from the appliance.

13. Cleaning - The appliance should be cleaned only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

14. Nonuse Periods - The power cord of the appliance should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of

time.

15. Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that objects

do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through

openings.

16. Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced

by qualified service personnel when:

A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or

C. The appliance has been exposed to rain; or

D. The appliance does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance; or

E. The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.

17. Servicing - The user should not attempt to service the appliance

beyond that described in the operating instructions.

All other servicing should be referred to qualified service

personnel.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral

triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of

uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure

that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric

shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended

to alert the user to the presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the appliance.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF

PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION:

POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE

LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE

CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU'

AU FOND.

An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause

the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

7. Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be mounted to

a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

8. Ventilation - The appliance should be situated so that its location

or position dose not interfere with its proper ventilation.

For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed,

sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation

openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase

or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation

openings.

"WARNING"

"TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR

MOISTURE."

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the appliance is operated.

2. Retain Instructions - The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions should

be followed.

5. Water and Moisture - The appliance should not be used near

water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink,

laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and

the like.

6. Carts and Stands - The appliance should be used only with a

cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.

Safety Instructions/Precautions

Precautions

• Be sure to connect the VF80 to the power supply specified

in the Specifications section of this owner’s manual.

Do not use an AC outlet of any other voltage.

• Do not connect the VF80 to the same AC outlet to which

devices that could generate noise (such as a large motor

or dimmer), or the devices that consume a large amount

of power (such as an air conditioning system or large

electric heater) are connected.

• If you use the VF80 in an area with a different power

voltage, first consult your dealer or the nearest Fostex

service station. You can use the VF80 with a power

frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz.

• It is very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or

damage. In such a case, stop using the VF80 immediately

and ask your dealer to repair the cord.

• To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the VF80,

avoid contact with water or other liquids, or do not handle

the power plug while your hands are wet.

• To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the

VF80, do not remove the main unit cover or reach the

inside the VF80.

• Do not let water or other liquid, or metal objects such as

pins, accidentally enter the inside of the VF80 because

this may lead to electric shock or damage. Should water

enter the inside of the VF80, remove the power plug from

AC outlet, and consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX

service station.

• To prevent damage to the VF80, be sure to power on the

connected devices first, then turn on the power to the

VF80. When you remove or connect the cables to the

input/output connectors on the VF80, make sure that the

track and master faders and volume controls are set to

“0.”

Important!

Equipment name, electrical

ratings, serial number and

other information for the

VF80, are written on bottom

side.

About power supply

• The VF80 does not use any parts that user can repair

easily. Contact your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service

station to ask about repairs.

• Use the packing carton designed for the VF80 when you

transport the VF80 to the dealer for repair or return.

If you have discarded the packing box, try to pack the

VF08 completely using shock absorbing materials.

Fostex is not responsible for malfunction or damage due

to incomplete packaging or caused during transport.

• It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording

or video images or audio data for which copyright is

possessed by a third party for commercial purposes such

as contents, broadcasts, sales, or distribution-any

purpose other than for your personal pleasure.

• Fostex is not responsible for any “direct damage” or

“indirect damage” caused by using the VF80.

Note on repair

About copyrights

About damage

Precautions upon handling the HD

• Before turning the power off to the VF80, first quit setup

mode and make sure that the recorder section is stopped.

Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to the VF80

while the hard disk is accessing data (the HD ACCESS LED

is lit or flashing). Otherwise, not only will you lose

recorded data, but you may damage to the VF80.

Fostex is not responsible for the data lost during operation

of the VF80.

• Before you change the location of the VF80, pack the unit

in the shipping carton or an impact-resistant case.

Make sure that the VF80 is kept free from external

vibration or impact since the VF80 is very sensitive to

vibration.

• Do not install the VF80 in locations subject to the

following:

* Extremely high or low temperature, or significant

changes in temperature.

* Excessive humidity or dust.

* Excessive changes in power supply voltage.

* Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking

surfaces.

* Near a strong magnetic field (such as a TV or

speaker).

• If you move the unit from a place with an excessively low

temperature to a warm place, or if you use the VF80 in a

room in which the temperature varies significantly during

winter, condensation may occur on the hard disk or other

parts. In such cases, leave the VF80 for about an hour in

the new location before you turn on the power.

Delay of display indication

• While using the VF80, you may have an experience to see

the delay of the reaction of the time counter or level

meters. This is not a malfunction and it bears no relation

to the actual sound to be recorded or played.

This kind of delay is due to the VF80 design concept in which

the audio processing takes priority over the display

processing when the audio processing gets busy (e.g. when

a sudden fader level change happens). You may always trust

the VF80 to record or playback audio in good condition.

Time counter

Level meters

MODEL VF80

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

FOSTEX

230V~ 20W 50/60Hz

SERIAL NO.

MADE IN CHINA

FOSTEX CORP.

Contents

“See this page” information by subject

The following shows reference pages where you can find information you need.

See also “The table of contents” shown on page 6.

I want to record my performance.

Please read pages 28 and 30.

I want to replace a part of the previous recording

with a new recording.

Please read page 33.

I want to copy a part of a song to another track.

Please read page 63.

I want to exchange tracks.

Please read page 68.

I want to create multiple programs.

Please read page 61.

I want to control the VF80 via MIDI.

Please read pages 91, 92, and 94.

I want to make my original CD.

Please read page 115.

I want to record audio on a CD or MD disc

to the VF80 digitally.

Please read page 90.

I want to make a backup of song data.

Please read page 96.

I want to use a condenser microphone.

Please read page 27.

I want to equalize the sound.

Please read pages 36 and 40.

I want to delete a program.

Please read page 62.

I want to locate the desired position.

Please read pages 32 and 59.

I want to format a hard disk.

Please read page 20.

I want to mixdown tracks to an external

master recorder.

Please read pages 38 and 76.

I want to know details about the demonstration song.

Please read page 24.

I want to know details about the internal effects.

Please read page 44.

I want to save or load the mixing setting.

Please read page 52.

I want to cue audio at fast speed to search the

desired position.

Please read page 56.

I want to scrub audio to search the desired position.

Please read page 57.

I want to record or playback audio by

altering the speed.

Please read page 58.

I want to record audio with applying the

internal effects.

Please read pages 37, 45, 76 and 83.

Contents

I want to put a desired name to a program.

Please read page 62.

I want to record a material while monitoring

the input signal.

Please read page 72.

I want to install the optional CD-RW/CD-R drive.

Please read page 134.

I want to erase unnecessary songs.

Please read pages 62 and 66.

I want to know details about the training mode.

Please read page 74.

I want to know details about the mastering mode.

Please read page 76.

I want to make track bouncing (ping-pong recording).

Please read page 73.

I want to protect a recorded program.

Please read page 129.

I want to save song data by the WAV file format.

Please read page 109.

I want to control panning.

Please read pages 36 and 40.

I want to save song data to a DAT.

Please read page 97.

I want to make a tempo map.

Please read pages 122 and 124.

I want to mixdown tracks without using

an external master recorder.

Please read page 79.

I want to set the MTC offset time.

Please read page 127.

I want to synchronize the VF80 with an external

device.

Please read page 91.

I want to feed the MIDI sync signal to an

external MIDI device.

Please read page 126.

I want to know format information of a hard disk.

Please read page 132.

I want to exchange the hard disk.

Please read page 21.

I want to save song data to a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

Please read page 102.

I want to copy a song recorded on a CD

available on the market.

Please read page 118.

I want to delete unnecessary programs.

Please read page 62.

I want to know details about the insert effect.

Please read page 83.

I want to repeat playback of the desired part.

Please read page 59.

Contents

• Safety Instructions ........................................2

• Precautions ........................................................ 3

About power supply ................................................... 3

Precautions upon handling the hard disk ................. 3

Note on repair ............................................................. 3

About copyright.......................................................... 3

About damage ............................................................. 3

Basic Features of VF80

• Product Features................................................ 9

• Before Operating .............................................. 10

RECORDING method ................................................. 10

Program ..................................................................... 10

Remain Indicator ...................................................... 10

Additional track ........................................................ 11

INPUT monitor and REPRO monitor ........................ 11

Event .......................................................................... 11

Trim ........................................................................... 12

Time Base .................................................................. 12

Names and Functions

Top panel (Analog input/output section) .............. 14

Top panel (Mixer section) ........................................ 15

Top panel (Recorder/display section) .................... 16

Rear panel ................................................................. 19

Side Panel .................................................................. 19

About the hard disk storage device

Reformatting the Hard Disk ..................................... 20

Replacing a Hard Disk .............................................. 21

Formatting the New Hard Disk ................................ 23

Basic Recording and Playback

• About a demonstration song! .......................... 24

• Connections of external equipment ................ 25

• LCD ................................................................... 26

Display when turning on the power ........................ 26

Switching the time base ............................................ 26

“Disk remain” indication ......................................... 26

• Preliminary knowledge .................................... 27

Inputs and tracks ...................................................... 27

How to use condenser microphones ........................ 27

• Basic recording (recording onto a single track) .. 28

Preparation for recording ........................................ 28

Contents

Recording .................................................................. 29

Playback .................................................................... 29

• Basic recording (recording onto two track)..... 30

Preparation for recording ........................................ 30

Recording .................................................................. 31

Playback .................................................................... 31

• Mark function ................................................... 32

Setting a mark on the fly .......................................... 32

Locating a mark ........................................................ 32

Deleting a mark ........................................................ 32

• ABS Locate....................................................... 33

• Punch In/Out .................................................... 33

Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit ... 33

Punch in/out using the Foot Switch ........................ 33

Auto punch in/out function .................................... 34

• Mixing ............................................................... 36

Adjusting levels ........................................................ 36

Setting PAN position ................................................. 36

Adjusting EQ ............................................................. 36

Setting effects ............................................................ 37

• Mix Down .......................................................... 38

Analog Mix Down ...................................................... 38

Digital Mix Down ...................................................... 38

Mixer Functions

• Initial condition when turning the power ......... 39

• Operations while the Normal display is shown 39

Fader .......................................................................... 39

Track mute ................................................................ 39

Master fader mute .................................................... 39

• Mix Parameter Edit ........................................... 40

Adjusting PAN position ...........................................40

Editing EQ ...............................................................41

Preset entries in the EQ library ........................... 42

Setting effects ......................................................... 44

How to make the loop effect setting ....................... 45

Setting effect send levels ..................................... 46

Selecting an effect type ........................................ 47

Selecting pre/post of the effect send .................. 47

Turning the effect processor on or off ................ 48

About the effect types .......................................... 49

Scene memory ........................................................52

Storing the current scene .................................... 52

Recalling a scene .................................................. 52

Deleting a scene ................................................... 53

Fader adjust .......................................................... 53

Scene sequence ......................................................54

Contents

Assigning scene memories to the mark map ...... 54

Deleting a mark from the mark map .................. 55

Scene sequence on/off selection ......................... 55

Executing the scene sequence ............................. 55

Recorder Functions

• Cueing .............................................................. 56

Cueing with the [F FWD]/[REWIND] keys ............... 56

Shuttle cueing .........................................................56

Digital scrubbing ..................................................... 57

Performing digital scrubbing .............................. 57

Storing the digital scrub point ............................ 57

• Variable Pitch .................................................... 58

Turning on or off the vari pitch function ............... 58

Setting the Speed ...................................................... 58

• Loop Function .................................................. 59

Setting the start and end points ............................. 59

Capturing the current position on the fly .......... 59

Editing the position via the screen ..................... 59

Setting the start and end points by marks ......... 60

Carrying out the loop playback............................... 60

• Program ............................................................ 61

Creating a new program ........................................... 61

Selecting a program .................................................. 62

Deleting a program ................................................... 62

Editing a program title ............................................. 62

• Track editing ..................................................... 63

Copy & Paste and Move & Paste ............................. 63

Performing Copy (or Move) Paste ....................... 64

Undo/redo of Copy (or Move) Paste ................... 65

Erasing track data ................................................... 66

Erasing .................................................................. 66

Undo/redo of Erase .............................................. 67

Track Exchange ....................................................... 68

Performing the track exchange ........................... 68

• Editing marks ................................................... 69

Viewing the mark list ............................................... 69

Editing a mark position ...........................................69

Enter a mark title ..................................................... 70

Adding a mark ......................................................... 70

Deleting a mark ....................................................... 71

Locating a mark ....................................................... 71

Advanced Operations

• Metronome function......................................... 72

Setting the tempo map ............................................... 72

Setting the metronome output ................................... 72

Setting the time base to bar/beat ............................... 72

Monitoring the metronome sound ............................ 72

• Track bounce (Ping-pong recording) ............... 73

On/Off of bounce mode ............................................. 73

Setting pan position ................................................... 73

Setting level of each track .......................................... 73

Performing the track bounce ..................................... 73

• Training mode ................................................... 74

Connecting the instrument and headphones ........ 74

On/Off of training mode ....................................... 74

Slowing down the playback speed ......................... 75

Changing the pitch ................................................ 75

Canceling the center-positioned sound ................. 75

Setting the cancel position .................................... 75

Boosting the bass sound ........................................ 75

Playing along with the playback sound ................. 75

• Mastering mode ............................................... 76

Selecting a program to be played back .................. 76

On/Off of mastering mode .................................... 76

Setting the mastering effects ................................. 77

On/Off the mastering effects ................................. 77

Recording onto the master recorder ..................... 77

Effect library details .............................................. 77

• Internal mastering function ............................. 79

Rehearsing internal mastering .................................. 80

Performing internal mastering .................................. 81

About Start and End points ................................... 82

• Using the insert effect ...................................... 83

Rehearsal ................................................................. 84

Recording the guitar ................................................. 85

Recording with effect ................................................ 86

• Digital Recording ............................................. 90

Recording an external source onto the VF80 digitally 90

Selecting a program to be recorded ...................... 90

Selecting the digital input ..................................... 90

Selecting a track to record ..................................... 90

Starting to record .................................................. 90

• MIDI Clock Sync System .................................. 91

Connecting to external equipment ........................ 91

Setup of the VF80 .................................................. 92

Executing of recording .......................................... 92

Confirming the MIDI clock sync ............................ 92

• MIDI Sync/MIDI Machine Control System ........ 92

Connecting to external equipment ........................ 93

Setup of external equipment ................................. 93

Setup of the VF80 .................................................. 93

Confirming MTC sync/MMC ................................. 93

Executing of recording .......................................... 93

• External MIDI equipment Sync System by the Slave Mode..94

Connecting to external equipment ........................ 94

Setup of external equipment ................................. 94

Setup of the VF80 .................................................. 94

Confirming chase lock ........................................... 94

Executing of recording .......................................... 95

Contents

Save/Load of Song Data

• About Song Data .............................................. 96

Items that can be saved or loaded as song data ......... 97

• Save/load using the S/PDIF digital signal........ 97

Notes for digital audio recorder to be used ................ 97

Notes for saving data using the S/P DIF digital signal 97

Saving data using the S/P DIF digital signal .............. 98

Connecting to an external digital recorder ............ 98

Setting the external recorder ................................. 98

Saving data ............................................................ 98

Loading data using the S/P DIF digital signal .......... 100

Connecting to an external digital recorder .......... 100

Setting the external recorder ............................... 100

Loading data ........................................................ 100

• Save/load using CD-RW/CD-R ....................... 102

Please read this first! ................................................ 102

Saving data using a CD-RW drive (Backup) ............. 104

Loading backup data from a CD-RW drive ............... 107

Saving a WAV file .................................................... 109

Important notes for using a WAV file .................. 109

About WAV file saved .......................................... 112

Loading a WAV file .................................................. 113

Special loading method when using a computer.. 114

Making an audio CD ................................................ 115

Loading from an audio CD ...................................... 118

SETUP Mode

• To enter the SETUP mode .............................. 122

• Time Signature Setting ................................... 122

New Registering of Time Signature .......................... 122

Correcting the Registered Time Signature ............... 122

Deleting of Time Signature ...................................... 122

Clearing All Time Signature data ............................. 122

Changing the Bar Offset Figure ................................ 122

• Setting a Tempo .............................................. 124

New Registering of Tempo ....................................... 124

Correction of the Registered Tempo ........................ 124

Erasing of the Registered Tempo ............................. 124

• Setting the Metronome function .................... 125

• Setting MIDI sync output signal ..................... 126

• Setting an MTC frame rate ............................. 126

• Setting an MTC offset value ........................... 127

• Setting MTC offset mode ............................... 127

• Setting the Slave mode .................................. 128

• Setting the Slave type .................................... 128

• Setting the Record Protect function .............. 129

• Setting Digital Input ....................................... 130

• Setting BAR/BEAT Resolution mode............. 130

• Setting the MIDI device number..................... 131

• Checking the number of track events............ 131

• The Drive Format Information........................ 132

• Fader Fix mode Setting .................................. 132

• Fader Recall mode Setting............................. 133

Appendix

• Installing the CD-1A ....................................... 134

How to install the CD-1A .......................................... 135

Opening/closing the tray ......................................... 136

Placing/removing a disc .......................................... 136

Others

• MIDI Implementation Chart ............................ 137

• MMC Command List ....................................... 138

• Inquiry Message List ...................................... 138

• Maintenance ................................................... 139

• Specifications ................................................ 139

• Block Diagram................................................ 140

• Dimensions .................................................... 141

Basic Features of VF80

The VF80 Digital Multitracker incorporates a digital mixer with an 8-track (plus 16-additional track)

digital recorder.

The digital mixer section features a high-performance DSP multi-effect processor employing the A.S.P.

(Fostex Advanced Signal Processing) technology originally developed by Fostex. The digital recorder

section allows you to record and playback uncompressed linear 16-bit/44.1 kHz digital audio.

You can make all process for music production such as overdubbing, track bounce, effect processing,

mixdown and mastering in the digital domain without sound deterioration.

In addition, by installing the optional CD-RW drive (Model CD-1A), you can save/load to /from CD-

RW/CD-R discs (the WAV file format also supported), as well as create original audio CDs.

Product Features

Mixer Section

• Built in a high-performance DSP multi-effect

processor employing the A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced

Signal Processing) technology

• 7 track faders and a stereo master fader allow you to

control signal levels intuitively.

• The track ON/OFF switch is provided for each track.

The 2-band EQ with the EQ library and the effect send

with PRE/POST selection are provided for Tracks 1

through 6.

• Both balanced (XLR) and unbalanced (1/4" phone)

connectors are provided for each analog input.

The phantom power is also available when using the

balanced connector. Also the trim knob on each input

makes it possible to accept a wide range of input

signals from microphone to line levels.

• "Bounce" function allows bouncing signals from tracks

1 through 6 to tracks 7/8 with a single key operation.

• The mastering mode allows transferring audio on the

master tracks (7/8) to an external recorder with

applying the EQ, reverb and compressor.

• The “REC EFFECT” function allows you to rerecord a

recorded track while applying an effect (insert effect).

Some distortion and simulation effects are available

only for the insert effect.

• "Training mode" helps you to practice your instrument

by slowing down playback, shifting the pitch of the

recorded performance or masking the solo

instrument/voice.

• "Scene memory" function allows you to save and load

up to 99 mixer scenes including fader positions and

EQ/effect settings.

• You can feed the mixed-down signal from the S/PDIF

output connector to an external digital device such as

a DAT recorder for digital recording.

• The “Internal Mastering” function allows you to make

mastering to VF80’s internal tracks, without the need

of an external master recorder.

In addition, by installing the CD-RW drive (Model CD-

1A), you can create original audio CDs using mastered

materials.

Recorder Section

• Employs the Fostex original FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk

Management System-3) format, allowing high quality

recording/playback with uncompressed linear 16-bit/

44.1 kHz digital audio on 8 tracks, as well as 16

additional tracks. You can record about 3 hours of

mono audio per 1 GB disk space.

• Nondestructive audio editing functions such as copy,

paste, move, erase and undo/redo are possible.

• The "Program" function allows you to give a title to

each song and manage up to 99 titles.

• +/- 6.0% pitch control.

• Accepts S/PDIF digital signal and records it directly

onto any VF80 track.

• The auto punch in/out function with rehearsal mode.

The IN and OUT points can be set with 1/100 frame

accuracy. You can also carry out punch in/out manu

ally using the foot switch.

Others

• Dot-matrix LCD and self-illuminating keys allow you

to know the current status visually, as well as to make

settings of the mixer and recorder easily.

• Durable and reliable 3.5-inch E-IDE standard hard

disk is built in.

• Save/load of song data using the S/PDIF (optical)

signal is possible.

• By installing the optional CD-RW drive (Model CD-1A),

you can save/load data to/from CD-RW/CD-R discs.

• Feeds MIDI clock with song position pointer or MTC

(MIDI Time Code).

• Supports MMC (MIDI Machine Control).

• Can be slaved to an external MTC.

• The internal metronome function can be used for

recording a guide track.

• The bar/beat resolution function allows editing by

beat (the clock digit is omitted).

• Up to 99 mark points can be set per each song.

You can locate any mark point or make the mark map

of a scene.

Basic Features of VF80

Remain indicator

Recording method

Program

Program number/title ("01" is the program number while

"#0001" is a default title)

The remaining time is 13h 28m 15s.

Before Operating

This section describes the basics that you should know before you start operating the VF80.

All users, including those who are familiar with using tape-based Multitracker and those who are new

to Multitracker, should read this section thoroughly to understand the functions of the VF80.

The VF80 uses a hard disk as a recording medium,

instead of a conventional tape.

You can start recording sound sources from any point

on a disk as long as the point is within the range of 24

hours in ABS time. Also you locate any point within

the range. You may think of the VF80 as incorporat-

ing tapes on which 24-hour time information is

striped.

You can record in any area within 24 hours in ABS time.

ABS 0: The beginning time at 00H 00M 00S

REC END: The end time of recording (in the example

above, 00H 15M 00S)

With a tape recorder, the maximum recording time

depends on the tape length, regardless of the amount

of unrecorded areas. With the VF80, you can use the

media more efficiently because no disk space is used

for unrecorded areas.

You can use up to 99 "tapes with 24-hour time infor-

mation" with the VF80. Each "tape" is called a "Pro-

gram".

A program exists independently on the hard disk,

therefore, you can freely record, playback or edit each

program without affecting other programs.

You can give a name (program title) to each program,

so you can easily identify a program.

"Program title" with its program number appears at

the top left of the normal screen as shown below.

The remain indicator shows how much recording time

is left on the current hard disk.

The VF80 program is managed by a 24-hour time

counter, however, the actual recording time left de-

pends on the available disk space.

The remain indicator appears on the LCD during re-

cording (or on REC standby), showing the rough re-

maining time if you record on a mono track.

Note that if the remaining time is 100 hours or more,

the indicator shows the available (remaining) disk

space in MB.

The remaining value is calculated on a mono-track

basis. That is, the value indicates recordable time if

you record on a mono track. You can calculate the

recordable time when recording on more than one

track easily by dividing the time by the track num-

ber.

In the example above, if you record on 2 tracks, the

recordable time is about 6 hours 44 minutes (13 hours

28 minutes 15 seconds divided by 2). Or if you record

on 8 tracks, the recordable time is about 1 hour 41

minutes (13 hours 28 minutes 15 seconds divided by

8).

The VF80 manages up to 99 programs on the hard

disk. Each program includes not only the recording

data but also various setting information which con-

sumes a small amount of disk space. Therefore, note

that the remaining time shown on the screen is a rough

value.

Always check the remaining time left before starting

recording, to ensure that you have enough disk space

to work with.

ABS0

00m 00s 05m 00s 10m 00s REC END

15m 00s 23h 59m 59s

recorded area recorded areaunrecorded area unrecorded area ......

You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time.

5 minute recording

unrecorded 5 minute recording 24 hour recording

recorded area recorded area unrecorded area (remain) ......

Basic Features of VF80

Input monitor and Repro monitor

EventAdditional track

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Track 12

Track 13

Track 14

Track 15

Track 16

Track 17

Track 18

Track 19

Track 20

Track 21

Track 22

Track 23

Track 24

A program on the VF80 consists of 24 tracks. Tracks

1 through 8 are called "Real tracks" which you can

record, playback and edit. Tracks 9 through 24 are

called "Additional tracks". Using the "Track Exchange"

function, you can exchange between "real track(s)"

and "additional track(s)" in one-track, 2-track or 8-

track block.

This makes it possible to record solo on several tracks,

exchange tracks and compare the results, or to record

different rhythm versions using multiple tracks, ex-

change the rhythm tracks completely and making a

remix version.

Note that tracks 9 through 24 cannot be recorded,

played or edited. The tracks you want to work with

must be set as tracks 1 through 8.

There are two modes for monitoring a track of the

VF80 ; "Repro monitor" and "Input monitor".

"Repro monitor" means that the track playback sig-

nal is monitored.

"Input monitor" means that the input source of the

track is monitored. You can check the signal level for

recording in this mode.

Input monitor is only available for tracks to be re-

corded (on REC standby) or currently being recorded.

Each time you make a recording, an independent

audio file is created on each recorded track. A silent

part on a track is also recognized as a file.

These files (audio files and silent files) are called

"events".

With the VF80, you can create up to 512 events per

track. You cannot make any further recording when

512 events are created. In the normal use, 512 events

are enough.

The VF80 can show the current number of events on

the LCD. It also shows a warning message if you are

going to make recording when 512 events already

exist. You may resolve this problem by saving the

program (see "Save/Load of a program").

Let's count the events for each recording step (A

through E) below.

A.Before recording, there is a single event (silent file) on the track

(the VF80 recognizes a silent part as a file).

B.After making a recording (REC B), there are two events on

the track; the recorded audio file and the following silent part.

C.After making another recording (REC C) continuously from

the end point of REC B, there are three events on the track;

two audio files and the following silent part.

D.After locating a point ahead of REC C and then making an

other recording (REC D), there are totally five events on the

track. Note that a silent file is created between Rec C and Rec

E.After making a recording (REC E) over REC B and REC C,

there are four events on the track.

Signal input in the recorder Signal output from the recorder

1 track

5 track

6 track

3 track

READY

4 track

READY

Playback sound (Playback monitor)

Input signal (Input monitor)

2 track

Playback sound (Playback monitor)

7 track

8 track

Playback sound (Playback monitor)

A Silence

B SilenceRec B

C Rec B Rec C Silence

D Rec B Rec C Silence SilenceRec D

E Rec E Silence SilenceRec D

8 track block exchange

2 track block exchange

One track exchange

Basic Features of VF80

Time Base

.....

ABS

MTC

00M 00S 00M 03S 00M 06S

00H 59M 57S 01H 00M 00S 01H 00M 03S

BAR/ /CLK

001BAR 1- 002BAR 1 002BAR 1

ABS 0

The term "Time base" frequently appears in this

manual. The time base is used to show the location in

the recorder, like the "tape counter" of conventional

tape recorders.

There are three types of time bases:

1. ABS (Absolute time)

2. Bar/Beat/Clk (Bar/Beat/Clock)

3. MTC (MIDI Time Code)

You can switch between these time bases by pressing

the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

The ABS shows the absolute time of each program and

is striped from 00h 00m 00s (=ABS 0) to 23h 59m 59s

when a program is created.

The example below shows the current recorder posi-

tion is at 00m (minute) 00s (second) 00f (frame).

The hour digit appears only when the ABS time ex-

ceeds 01h 00m 00s 00f.

ABS 0 is the reference position for managing all the

location and related to other time bases.

Bar/Beat/Clk shows the musical position generated

from the internal tempo map of the VF80 (including

time signature and tempo).

The example below shows the current recorder posi-

tion is at beat 1 of bar -2.

This position (beat 1 of bar -2) corresponds to ABS 0

and the following bar/beat numbers are determined

according to the time signature and tempo settings.

Beat 1 of bar -2 corresponds to ABS 0 as the default

setting, however, you can change to set it between bar

-9 and bar -2.

MTC (MIDI Time Code) runs in sync with the ABS time.

The MTC value (**h **m **s) corresponding to ABS 0

can be set, which is called "MTC offset".

If you set the MTC offset to 01h 00m 00s, the MTC will

start from 01h 00m 00s, and at the ABS 00h 00m 00s

position, the MTC value will be 02h 00m 00s

The example below shows that the current position is

at MTC 00h 59m 57s

The default MTC offset is 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf. You

can change the offset to any time value of 24-hour

clock.

It is also possible to set the MTC offset by setting the

MTC value corresponding to "beat 1 of bar 1" instead

of "ABS 0".

The following diagram illustrates the relationship

between the three time bases.

Trim

It is important to set the analog input level appropri-

ately when converting an analog input signal from

[INPUT] A or B into a digital signal (A/D conversion).

You can adjust the analog level using the [TRIM] con-

trol. The [PEAK] indicator lights if the level is too high.

If the [TRIM] setting is not appropriate and the ana-

log input level is too high (if the PEAK indicator lights),

the signal will be converted into a distorted digital

signal, resulting digital noise. You cannot eliminate

this distortion/noise from the sound in the following

stages. Therefore, be sure to adjust the level appro-

priately using the [TRIM] knob not to light the [PEAK]

indicator when receiving the loudest audio input sig-

nal.

Clip level

Appropriate gain Excessive gain

Names and functions

Rear panel

Top panel

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2 3 4 5 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

Names and Functions

Names and functions

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

BOUNCE

REC EFF

123456789

Top panel (Analog input/output section)

5. [INPUT B/BAL] (Balanced) connector

• Connects to the balanced output of an external sound

source.

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV (approx. -48

dBu to +4 dBu)

• Connector type: XLR-3-31 type (pin #2 hot)

• A phantom power (+48 V) can be supplied for using a

condenser microphone by setting the [PHANTOM]

switch on the rear panel to ON.

• When the [INPUT B/UNBAL] connector is plugged, the

input from this connector is interrupted.

6. [INPUT B/TRIM] knob

• Controls the gain according to the signal from [INPUT B].

• You can adjust the gain to accept input signals between

-50 dBV (MIC) and +2 dBV (LINE).

7. [PHONES] (Headphones) knob

• Adjusts the level of headphones for monitoring.

8. [PHONES] (Headphones) connector

• Connects headphones for monitoring.

• Connector type: TRS phone jack

9. [ST OUT L. R] (Stereo out) connector

• Outputs the stereo (L and R) buss signal.

• Connects to a master recorder, etc.

• Reference output level: -10 dBV

• Connector type: phone jack

1. [INPUT A/UNBAL] (Unbalanced) connector

• Connects to the unbalanced output of an external sound

source.

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV

• Connector type: phone jack

• When this connector is plugged, the input from the

[INPUT A/BAL] connector is interrupted.

2. [INPUT A/BAL] (Balanced) connector

• Connects to the balanced output of an external sound

source.

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV (approx. -48

dBu to +4 dBu)

• Connector type: XLR-3-31 type (pin #2 hot)

• A phantom power (+48 V) can be supplied for using a

condenser microphone by setting the [PHANTOM]

switch on the rear panel to ON.

• When the [INPUT A/UNBAL] connector is plugged, the

input from this connector is interrupted.

3. [INPUT A/TRIM] knob

• Controls the gain according to the signal from [INPUT

A].

• You can adjust the gain to accept input signals between

-50 dBV (MIC) and +2 dBV (LINE).

4. [INPUT B/UNBAL] (Unbalanced) connector

• Connects to the unbalanced output of an external sound

source.

• Reference input level: -50 dBV to +2 dBV

• Connector type: phone jack

• When this connector is plugged, the input from the

[INPUT B/BAL] connector is interrupted.

Names and functions

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

15 16

Top panel (Mixer section)

11. [PEAK] indicators

• Each indicator lights up when the corresponding input

signal reaches the clipping level.

• Set the [TRIM] knob properly not to light the indicator.

12. [CH ON/OFF] keys

• Each key is used to turn on and off of the

corresponding channel. When on, the key illuminates.

See the following description for details about how to use

each element.

10. [FOOT SW] (Foot switch) connector

• Connects to an optional foot switch (Model 8051) for

punch in/out operation.

• Connector type: phone jack

13. [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys

• While stopped, each key is used to change the track

status among OFF, PLAY and REC (READY).

During playback, pressing the key switches between OFF

and PLAY.

During recording, you cannot change the track status.

• When you view or edit mixer parameters such as pan

and EQ in the "Mix parameter edit" mode (described

later), you can select the target track by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

• The illumination of each key shows the track status as

follows.

* flashing in red: the track is in REC READY.

* lighting in red: the track is being recorded.

* lighting in green: the track can be played back.

* not lighting (off): the track is muted.

14. [BOUNCE] key

• Turns the bounce mode on or off.

When on (the key lights), tracks 7-8 are automatically

armed for recording, allowing track 1 through 5 signals

to bounce to track 7 and 8.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

enters the “REC EFFECT” mode, in which rerecording a

recorded track with applying the “insert effect” is

possible. While the “REC EFFECT” mode is active, the

[BOUNCE] key flashes in red. To exit the “REC EFFECT”

mode, press the [BOUNCE] key again.

15. [MIX PARAMETER-PAN] key

• When viewing or editing the pan pot setting, press this

key.

• Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

Do not power on the machine with non-specified foot

SW connected to the foot SW jack. When powering on

the machine with non-specified foot SW (latch type foot

SW, etc.) connected to the foot SW jack, there is a case

that the machine does not correctly boot up with “No

Drive!” alter message. In such a case, power off the

machine once, disconnect the foot SW and then power

back on.

Names and functions

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2 3 4 5 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

BOUNCE

REC EFF

26 27 28

38394041

4344

454647

Top panel (Recorder/Display section)

20. [2TRK MODE-TRAINING] key

• Turns on or off the "Training mode" in which only tracks

7-8 are played back. When the mode is active, the key

lights up.

21. [2TRK MODE-MASTERING] key

• Turns on or off the "Mastering mode" in which tracks

7-8 are played back with sound processing (the EQ,

reverb and compressor). When the mode is active, the

key lights up.

22. [STATUS/SEL-MASTER] key

• Turns on or off the master channel.

• Also used to select the track for the mix parameter edit.

23. [MASTER] fader

• Adjusts the output levels of the stereo L/R busses.

24. Track faders

• Adjusts the playback levels of the tracks 1 through 6 and

7-8.

16. [MIX PARAMETER-EQ] key

• When viewing or editing the EQ setting, press this key.

• Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

17. [MIX PARAMETER-SCENE / FADER] key

• When storing, recalling or deleting a scene memory,

press this key.

• To view track fader positions, press this key while de

pressing the [SHIFT] key.

18. [MIX PARAMETER-EFFECT / ON/OFF] key

• When selecting the internal DSP effects, adjusting the

effect send levels, selecting pre or post of the effect send,

or setting effect parameters, press this key.

• Select the track to be viewed or edited by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

19. [MIX PARAMETER-SCENE SEQ. / MAP] key

• Turns on or off the scene sequence mode.

• When editing the scene sequence map, press this key

while depressing the [SHIFT] key.

Names and functions

Do not turn off the VF80 power while this indicator

lights. Data recorded in the disk may be erased.

25. [TRACK EDIT / PGM] key

• When editing audio of tracks such as copy/paste, etc.,

press this key.

There are four audio editing functions.

a. copy

b. move

c. erase

d. track exchange

• Pressing this key while depressing the [SHIFT] key

allows you to carry out the following program-related

functions.

a. creating a new program

b. selecting a program

c. editing a program title

d. deleting a program

26. [CURSOR / / / ] keys

• Used to move the edit point in edit or setup mode.

27. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)

• Displays the recorder or mixer status or parameters.

28. Contrast adjusting knob

• Adjusts the LCD contrast.

Turning the knob clockwise makes the contrast higher,

while turning it counterclockwise makes it lower.

29. [ACCESS] indicator

• Lights up while the internal hard disk drive or external

backup SCSI device is writing or reading data.

30. [PHANTOM] indicator

• Lights up when the phantom power is supplied.

You can switch the phantom power on or off by the

[PHANTOM] switch on the rear panel.

31. [EXIT/NO / EJECT] key

• Used to cancel or interrupt SETUP menu settings or

audio editing functions such as Copy and Paste.

The opposite of the [ENTER/YES] key.

32. [ENTER/YES] key

• Used to execute SETUP menu settings or audio editing

functions such as Copy and Paste. The opposite of the

[EXIT/NO / EJECT] key.

33. [JOG / SHUTTLE] dial

• When the [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key is illuminated, after

pressing any of the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys,

rotating this dial scrubs audio digitally with no pitch

change for both forward and backward directions.

• Used to change a parameter value in the edit mode.

• Pressing this dial while holding down the [SHIFT] key

moves the position forward or backward at 1x to 64x

speed depending on the rotating direction and degree.

34. [SHIFT] key

• Used to activate the second (shifted) functions of keys

and a dial. Each shifted function is labeled in a while-

line boxes on the panel.

35. [LOCATE | / MARK] key

• Each press of this key locates the previous mark point.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

stores the current position in the mark map.

36. [LOCATE | / DELETE] key

• Each press of this key locates the next mark point.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

delete the current mark point directly.

37. [F FWD ] key

• Pressing this key while stopped fast-forwards the

position at 30x speed.

• Pressing this key during playback moves forward the

position at 3x speed with audible cue.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

executes the "LOCATE REC END" function (locates the

last recording position of the current program).

38. [REWIND ] key

• Pressing this key while stopped rewinds the position at

30x speed.

• Pressing this key during playback moves backward the

position at 3x speed with audible cue.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

executes the "LOCATE ABS 0" function (locates the

beginning of the current program).

39. [PLAY] key

• Pressing this key starts the recorder playback.

• Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down this key

(or pressing this key while holding down the [RECORD]

key) starts recording of the armed (REC READY) track(s).

• Pressing this key alone during recording punches out

(releases recording).

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

locates the last playback position.

40. [STOP] key

• Pressing this key during playback, recording, fast-

forward or rewinding stops the recorder running.

• Also used to cancel or interrupt SETUP menu settings

or audio editing functions such as Copy and Paste.

• Pressing the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key while holding

down this key executes the "LOCATE REC END" or

"LOCATE ABS 0" function.

• Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down this key

locates the last playback position.

• Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down this key

locates the last recording position.

41. [RECORD] key

• Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down this key (or

pressing this key while holding down the [PLAY] key)

starts recording of the armed (REC READY) track(s).

• Pressing this key alone switches the monitor of the

armed track (s) to Input monitor (the [RECORD] key

flashes).

Pressing this key again switches the monitor back to

Repro monitor.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [STOP] key

locates the last recording position.

Names and functions

In the example below, pressing the [SETUP / F1]

key, [TIME BASE SEL / F2] key or [UNDO/REDO / F3]

key executes "RECALL", "STORE" or "DELETE" re-

spectively.

SHIFT

UNDO / REDO

SEL

TIMEBASE

SETUP

F1 F2 F3

Recalling a scene Storing a scene Deleting a scene

42. [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key

• Pressing this key enters the scrub mode. In the scrub

mode, you can scrub audio forward or backward

digitally.

43. [VARI PITCH / EDIT] key

• Pressing this key switches between On and Off of the vari

pitch (vari-speed playback/recording) function.

When the function is active, this key is illuminated.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

makes you ready to edit the pitch value via the screen.

44. [LOOP / EDIT] key

• Pressing this key switches between On and Off of the loop

mode. When the mode is active, this key is illuminated.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

makes you ready to edit the loop parameters (Start point

and End point) via the screen.

45. [AUTO PUNCH I/O / EDIT] key

• Pressing this key switches between On and Off of the auto

punch mode. When the mode is active, this key is

illuminated.

• Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

makes you ready to edit the auto punch parameters (In

point and Out point) via the screen.

46. [TIME BASE SEL / F2] key

• Pressing this key switches the time base shown on the

screen among the following.

a. ABS (absolute time):

Absolute time from 00h00m00s to 23h59m59s.

b. Bar/Beat/Clk (Bar/Beat/Clock):

Bar/Beat/Clock according to the time signature and

tempo information set in the internal tempo map.

c. MTC (MIDI Time Code)

MTC with or without an offset to the ABS time.

• When a key icon is shown above "F2" on the screen,

pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

executes the function directly.

47. [SETUP / F1] key

• Pressing this key enters the setup mode for editing/

setting the initial setting parameters of recorder and

mixer.

• When a key icon is shown above "F1" on the screen,

pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

executes the function directly.

48. [UNDO/REDO / F3] key

• Pressing this key cancels the operation for the audio

editing (Copy, Paste, etc.), auto punch in/out or

recording, and returns to the previous condition.

This is the "undo" function.

• Pressing this key again returns to the condition before

carrying out the "undo" function. This is the "redo"

function.

• When a key icon is shown above "F3" on the screen,

pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key

executes the function directly.

Names and functions

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

49 50 51 52 53 54 55

Rear panel

Side panel

56. Slot for the optional CD-RW drive

• You can install the Model CD-1A optional CD-RW drive

in this slot.

• See page 134 for details about how to install the optional

CD-RW drive.

If you want to know details about the option, contact

your dealer or a Fostex sales office.

49. [AC IN] connector

• Connects the supplied AC power cord. Make sure that

the voltage of your AC outlet matches the specified

voltage.

50. [POWER] switch

• Turns on or off the power of the unit.

51. [PHANTOM] ON/OFF switch

• When the switch is set to ON, the phantom power is

supplied to the condenser microphone(s) connected to

the [INPUT A/BAL] and/or the [INPUT B/BAL] connector(s).

52. [S/P DIF / DATA OUTPUT] connector

• Outputs the S/P DIF digital signal. Used to connect to

the coaxial (S/P DIF) digital input of an external digital

device.

If the external device only provides the optical digital

input, use the Fostex COP-1 coaxial/optical converter.

• Connector: RCA pin jack

53. [S/P DIF / DATA INPUT] connector

• Accepts the S/P DIF digital signal. Used to connect to the

coaxial (S/P DIF) digital output of an external digital

device. If the external device only provides the optical

digital output, use the Fostex COP-1 coaxial/optical

converter.

• Connector: RCA pin jack

54. [MIDI OUTPUT] connector

• Connects to the MIDI IN connector of an external MIDI

device.

• Mainly transmits MIDI information for synchronization

such as MTC (MIDI Time Code) and MIDI clock with song

position pointer.

• Connector: DIN 5-pin type

55. [MIDI INPUT] connector

• Connects to the MIDI OUT connector of an external MIDI

device.

• Mainly receives MIDI control information such as MMC

(MIDI Machine Control).

• Connector: DIN 5-pin type

See an appropriate section for the detailed information of

each operation or function.

About the hard disk storage device

“Standard”

“Erase”

“Quick”

Flashing

About the hard disk storage device

The VF80 is complete with a 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk (storage device) which is formatted in the Master

8 mode. Therefore, there is no need to newly assemble a hard disk or to format the hard disk.

Reformatting the hard disk

This section describes how to reformat the hard disk.

The VF80 adopts a “FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management

System-3)” format which is a Fostex exclusive format.

24 additional tracks can be used in addition to

recording and playing 8-tracks of uncompressed

44.1kHz/16 bit high quality sound.

Note that, when you reformat your hard disk, you will

erase all data saved or recorded on the hard disk, as well

as all the settings made. Reformatting your hard disk

restore the VF80 back to the default setting.

Always make a point to check that there is no data that

you need remaining on the hard disk prior to

reformatting.

Turn ON the VF80.

Press the [SETUP] key.

The system will go to the SETUP mode.

The select display of the SETUP menu appears. (The

highlight indicates the menu that is currently selected.)

Turn the [JOG] dial to highlight the “Disk Format” menu

title, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

“IDE” indicates the current drive.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “IDE” is flashed.

The menu to select the format type appears.

The display will appear as follows, according to the

previous format type. “****” represents the name of the

drive.

The hard disk formatted in the “Standard” type upon

newly formatting the hard disk will show “Standard” and

“Erase”. The hard disk formatted in the “Quick” type

upon newly formatting the hard disk will show

“Standard” and “Quick”. The user can select one.

Flashing

The hard disk is formatted with the access time

of the unit sectors, while judging whether the

sectors are good or bad. The formatting time

tends to be longer with this type, however, the

reliability is better.

Therefore, it is recommended that this default

format type is selected under normal

conditions.

This choice is only available when a hard disk

previously formatted in the “Standard” type is

being reformatted. With this format, the

“Standard” type is maintained, while all data on

the hard disk are erased. The formatting time is

shorter than the time required to format a

“Standard” type.

This is a quick formatting procedure in which all

hard disk sectors are considered to be good

sectors. The formatting time is fast, however, the

procedure cannot discover bad sectors.

Therefore, it is recommended that this format type

is only used when formatting a new hard disk that

Fostex has already confirmed to operate

normally.

About the hard disk storage device

Select the format type with the [CURSOR / ] key. Then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes.

Flashing

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD] key

is depressed.

If the “Standard” format is selected and executed, the

formatting process takes place while showing the

progress of the good sectors (Good ***MB) on the disk,

bad sectors on the disk (Bad ***MB) and remainder

(Remain ***MB).

Nothing can be done during the formatting process.

Please wait for a while until the process is completed.

When the hard disk is successfully formatted

(formatting completed), the number of sectors and

noncontiguous sectors are shown after formatted, then

“Completed!” lights up. Formatting is completed

instantaneously if either “Erase” or “Quick” is selected

and executed.

For this reason, the “Completed!” message lights up

without showing the progress status while formatting

is taking place.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape from

the SETUP mode.

The Normal Screen appears indicating the beginning of

the program (P01) that is automatically created after

formatting the hard disk.

Replacing a hard disk

The user can immediately start recording with the

VF80. Note that the current hard disk can also be

replaced with another model for use with the VF80.

(However, please only use hard disks that Fostex

recommends.)

The updated information on the operation-

confirmed HD and backup media for VF80 is

mentioned in the following Fostex international

web site.

<http: // www. fostex.co.jp/int/index.htm>

For those who are unable to check our web site,

please contact the Fostex distributor in your

territory.

This section describes the procedures to replace the hard

disk. However, we recommended that the customer ask

the Fostex Customer Service Department to replace the

VF80 hard disk. Note that the product is not warranted

for any malfunctions that may occur after the customer

replaces the hard disk on their own. Also note that Fostex

will not be held liable for any accidents that may occur

during the replacement process or any hard disk

damages, if the customer decides to replace their own

hard disk on their own.

• Always turn OFF the power of the VF80 and unplug the

power plug from the electric outlet when replacing the

hard disk.

• Always place the hard disk on a flat and stable platform

during the replacement process. Place a soft cloth

under the unit to protect the product from scratching.

Gloves are recommended to prevent any hand injuries.

• A hard disk is an extremely sensitive precision device.

Never expose the hard disk to “

strong shocks

” when

replacing, assembling or handling. Never leave the

hard disk by a device that generates strong magnetic

fields.

• Always set the DIP switch and Jumper of the newly

assembled hard disk to the “

Cable Select

” setting.

The hard disk will not operate normally if the setting

is set to “

Slave

” or “

Master

” when the hard disk is

assembled. Refer to the User’s Manual of the hard disk

for more details on the DIP switch and Jumper settings.

• Note that the connector of some hard disks may be stiff,

and thus make it difficult or impossible to insert or

connect. Never apply excessive force to insert the

connector in such case. Always make a point to gently

insert the connector. Failure to do so may result in

unexpected injuries or damage the hard disk.

About the hard disk storage device

Unscrew the four screws from the bottom of the main

unit that are fixing the panel.

Turn over the panel that the hard disk is fixed according

to the instructions shown in the figure below.

Note that hard disk cables will be connected.

Be careful not to apply excessive force when turning

over the panel.

Remove the two cable connectors that are connected

to the hard disk.

Gently hold the connector and slowly pull out.

After disconnecting the cables, remove the panel that

is fixing the hard disk.

Unscrew the four screws with a screwdriver, as shown

in the Figure.

Fix a new hard disk to the panel in the reverse order of

removing the hard disk as performed earlier. Connect

the cables. Then house the hard disk at the bottom of

the main unit.

Follow the <Precautions> described earlier, and properly

assemble the parts.

When the new hard disk is successfully assembled,

go to the next section. Now, format the unformatted

hard disk.

About the hard disk storage device

Formatting the Hard disk

Carefully follow the instructions below to newly

format the hard disk properly.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The drive selection display appears.

“IDE” will be flashed.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key where the “IDE” is flashed.

The menu to select the format type appears.

“****” represents the name of the drive.

Either the “

Standard

” or “

Quick

” format type can

be selected. However, make sure that the

“Standard”

format type is selected when

formatting a newly installed hard disk.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key where the “Standard” is

flashed.

The format type selected is set and “Sure?” flashes.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the [RECORD] key

is depressed.

The formatting process is started. The formatting

process will take some time.

When the formatting is successfully completed,

“Completed!” will light up on the display.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to escape from

the SETUP mode.

The Normal Screen appears indicating the beginning

of the program (P01) that is automatically created after

formatting the hard disk.

Flashing

1Turn ON the VF80 after plugging the power cable in the

electric outlet.

The VF80 will startup. “Unformat!” will appear on the

LCD. The menu will automatically go to the SETUP

mode.

The display showing the “Disk Format” menu appears.

Basic Recording/Playback

Basic Recording and Playback

This chapter describes the basics of recording and playback audio using the VF80.

Before carrying out recording/playback, read “About a demonstration song!”, “Connections of exter-

nal equipment”, “Preliminary knowledge” and “LCD”.

About a demonstration song!

Your VF80 may have a demonstration song on program 1 (P01) when shipped (note that some VF80

units may not have a demonstration song, depending on the production). Please check whether a

demonstration song is recorded or not on your unit according the following manner.

If a demonstration song is recorded, you can listen to the song any time by playing back program

1 (see page 28 for details about how to play back a program).

Note that you cannot record a new material on program 1 if a demonstration song is recorded on

program 1. Therefore, before starting recording for the first time, you must carry out any of the

following operations.

Note: You can start recording without the need for carrying out any of the following operations if no

demonstration song is recorded on your unit.

If you wish to start recording while keeping the demonstration song

Create a new program.

The newly created program is not record-prohibited, so you can record a material onto it.

See page “61” for details about how to create a new program.

After turning on the unit and booting up program 1, press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

• If the level meters move:

A demonstration song is recorded.

Title of the recorded demonstration song will be

indicated for the program title.

• If the level meters do not move:

No demonstration song is recorded.

Temporary title such as "#0001" will be indicated

for the program title.

If you wish to record a material on program 1 (overwriting the demonstration song)

Set "Rec Protect" menu in the setup mode to "Off".

Now you can overwrite the demonstration song on program 1 by a new material.

See page “129” for details about how to make the record-protect setting to "Off".

If you wish to record a material onto program 1 after deleting the demonstration song

Delete program 1.

After deleting program 1, a new blank "program 1" is automatically created onto which you can

record a new material.

See page “62” for details about how to delete a program.

Basic Recording/Playback

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

TRIMTRIM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

REC EFF

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

Rear panel

Foot switch (mode 8051)

Amplifier + Speakers etc.

Microphones (Dynamic

or condenser type)

Headphones

Guitar processor

Electric bass

Electric guitar

Digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT etc.)

AC outlet

Sequencer

PC w/sequence software

Top panel

Connections of external equipment

You can connect various sound sources and external devices to the input and output connectors of the

VF80 as shown in the example below. When making connection, make sure that the [MASTER] fader

is set to the lowest (“∞”) position and the [PHONES] knob to the left most (“MIN”) position. Otherwise,

your speakers or headphones may damage by the audio noise generated when connecting cables.

<Note>

You cannot use both the

[BAL]

and

[UNBAL]

connectors on INPUT A and

INPUT B simultaneously. Plugging the

[UNBAL]

connector disconnects the

[BAL]

connector.

<Note>

Do not power on the machine with non-speci-

fied foot SW connected to the foot SW jack.

When powering on the machine with non-

specified foot SW (latch type foot SW, etc.)

connected to the foot SW jack, there is a case

that the machine does not correctly boot up

with “

No Drive!

” alert message. In such a case,

power off the machine once, disconnect the

foot SW and then power back on.

Basic Recording/Playback

Normal screen

Normal screen with BAR/BEAT/CLK time base

Normal screen with MTC time base

Screen example while starting up

Remaining time displayed in time

Remaining time displayed in MB

Normal screen with ABS time base

LCD

This section describes major contents on the LCD

display and their operations.

Display when turning on the power

When turning on the power of the VF80 on which a

formatted hard disk is installed, the unit starts up and

“Initial..” and “version number” appears on the LCD

display, followed by “Current Dr”, “IDE”, “hard disk name

(momentarily)” and “record mode (Standard or

Quick)”. Then the unit gets ready at the beginning

(ABS 0) of the program which was selected when the

power was turned off last time. The current position

is shown by the time base previously selected.

The display that appears when the unit gets ready is

call “Normal screen”. The Normal screen shows the fol-

lowing items.

1. Scene number & name

With the initial setting, “S00: Initial Mix” appears.

2. Program number & name

With the initial setting, “P01: #0001” (#0001 is a tentative

name) appears.

3. Mark number & name

With the initial setting, “00: ABS 0” appears, showing that

the current location is at the beginning of the program. When

the recorder starts running, “:” between the number and

name is replaced with “+”.

4. Time base

With the initial setting, the ABS time base is selected.

You can change the time base by using the [TIME BASE SEL]

key (see the next section).

5. Level meters for Tracks 1 through 8

6. Master level meters for the Stereo output (L, R)

Switching the time base

Each press of the [TIME BASE SEL] key cycles the time

base of the Normal screen between “ABS”, “BAR/BEAT/

CLK” and “MTC”.

“Disk remain” indication

You can check the disk remaining space which shows

the “recordable space left on the current disk”.

The disk remaining space (REM) is shown during “Rec

ready” or “Recording”, in “time” when the remaining

time is less than 100 hours, or in “MB (Megabyte)” of

the remaining space when it exceeds 100 hours.

Note that the remaining time is shown as the record-

able time when you record onto a single track.

You can calculate the recordable time for recording

onto 8 tracks by dividing the displayed remaining time

by 8.

Basic Recording/Playback

BALANCE

UNBALANCE

TRIM

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

BALANCE

UNBALANCE

TRIM

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

TRACK 1

TRACK 2

TRACK 3

TRACK 4

TRACK 5

TRACK 6

TRACK 7

TRACK 8

TRACK STATUS

/ TRACK SEL HARD DISK

INPUT A

INPUT B

OFF

ON OUTPUT INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

[PHANTOM] switch

Preliminary knowledge

• Inputs and tracks

You can record onto adjacent two tracks (Tracks 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, or 7-8) or a mono track (one of Tracks 1 through

6). You cannot select another combination.

The input signal from INPUT A is fed to odd tracks (1, 3, 5 and 7), while the input signal from INPUT B is fed to

even tracks (2, 4, 6 and 8). Because each input signal is directly fed to appropriate tracks, you cannot tailor the

signal when recording. However, you can add reverb or equalize the sound during mixdown, or rerecord a track

sound later with applying a distortion-type effect.

Both the balanced and unbalanced input connectors are provided for INPUT A and INPUT B, allowing connec-

tion of balanced and unbalanced devices. In addition, the phantom (DC 48 V) power can be supplied to the

balanced XLR inputs, so you can use condenser microphones that need the phantom power (see the following

section about how to use condenser microphones).

<Note>

You cannot use both the balanced and unbalanced inputs simultaneously.

When plugging the unbalanced (phone) input connector, the balanced (XLR) input connector is disconnected.

• How to use condenser microphones

When connecting a condenser microphone that needs the phantom power, set the [PHANTOM] switch on the rear

panel to “ON”. Read the following notes carefully before using the phantom power.

• Be sure to keep the following notes.

* When connecting a condenser microphone to the balanced input

connector of the VF80, check whether or not the microphone needs

the phantom power (+48 V).

* Switch the

[PHANTOM]

switch to ON after connecting a microphone.

* When switching the

[PHANTOM]

switch, or when plugging or

unplugging a microphone, mute the VF80 output signals.

* When connecting a dynamic microphone to the balanced input

connector, set the

[PHANTOM]

switch to OFF. Otherwise, the

microphone may damage.

• You cannot use the phantom power for following microphones.

* microphones with the unbalanced output

* high impedance microphones

* microphones with the XLR connectors that leaks a signal between

pin #2 and pin #1 or pin #3 and pin #1

* microphones with the center tapout type ground such as old-

fashioned ribbon microphones

Note that the VF80 power must be ON when

changing the

[PHANTOM]

switch setting.

Also note that the

[PHANTOM]

switch should be

set to “

OFF

” after using the phantom power.

Basic Recording/Playback

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

4 5 9 7 10

Basic recording (recording onto a single track)

At first, let’s record a single sound source onto a single track to know the basic recording procedure of the VF80

There are 8 recording tracks (Tracks 1 through 8) and you can record onto any desired track(s).

In the following example, we are going to record an electric guitar (with an effect unit) onto Track 1.

Before starting, set all the track faders (1 through 6 and 7-8) and the master fader to the lowest position (-∞), and

the [TRIM] knob to the left most position (LINE).

Preparation for recording

Connect the [INPUT A] UNBAL jack to the output of the

effect unit whose input is connected to a guitar.

To record onto Track 1, 3, 5 or 7, use INPUT A.

Connect the [PHONES] jack to headphones for moni-

toring.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Track

The key lighting in green changes to flashing in red,

showing Track 1 is now armed. (The “Remain” time is

shown on the screen.)

The [CH ON/OFF] key of INPUT A automatically lights.

In this condition, by pressing the [CH ON/OFF] key of IN-

PUT A, INPUT A can be muted.

Raise both the track 1 fader and master fader to “0” po-

sition.

This is preparation for monitoring sound. If both of

these faders are set at the minimum position, no sound

can be monitored.

<Note>

The track 1 fader can be used for adjusting the moni-

tor level without affecting the recording level. To

adjust the recording level, use the

[TRIM]

knob of

INPUT A.

Press the [RECORD] key.

The key starts flashing in red, while Track 1 (which is

armed) changes to the input monitor mode.

Basic Recording/Playback

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE UNDO / REDO

SETUP

PUNCH I/O

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

WAVE FORM

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

[UNDO/REDO] key

Use the [TRIM] knob of INPUT A while playing the gui-

tar to get proper gain.

Set the gain at maximum within the range in which the

[PEAK] indicator does not turn on when playing the

guitar at the loudest volume.

You can monitor both the input level of Track 1 and the

stereo (L & R) output level from the bar-graph meters

on the screen.

<Note>

Set the gain not to light the

[PEAK]

indicator when

playing the guitar at the loudest volume.

When the

[PEAK]

indicator lights, the input level is

too high and the sound may be distorted or digital

noise may be generated.

In the condition above, if you turn the [PHONES] knob

clockwise, you can monitor the sound from the head-

phones.

<Warning!>

Be careful not to excessively raise the

[PHONE]

volume.

Prolonged exposure to loud sounds may have an

adverse effect on hearing.

Recording

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP]

key to locate “ABS 0”.

If the current recorder position is “ABS 0”, you can skip

the operation above.

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the [RECORD]

key to start recording.

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Track 1 and the

[RECORD] key light on, showing the VF80 is now record-

ing.

The VF80 uses the direct recording method. In this

method, a digital signal just after the A/D conversion is

directly recorded onto a track, without being routed to

extra algorithms such as EQ.

You can add reverb or equalize the sound during

mixdown.

In addition, the insert effect function allows rerecord-

ing a track sound with applying a distortion-type effect

later. See “using the insert effect” on page 83.

When the recorder starts running, the mark number and name

shown on the top line of the screen changes as below, showing

that the current position is ahead of “ABS 0” point.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] key.

After showing “Please Wait!”, the LCD returns to the Nor-

mal screen.

To unarm a track, press the flashing [TRACK STA-

TUS/TRACK SEL] key twice. The key changes to light

in green.

Now you have recorded a sound source onto a track.

Playback

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP]

key to locate “ABS 0”.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

You can control the playback level by the track 1 fader.

If you find that the recording was not successfully made,

use the undo/redo function and try recording again.

The playback level of each recorded track can be con-

trolled using the corresponding track fader.

You can mute the playback track by pressing the cor-

responding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key except

in the mix parameter edit mode.

Undo/Redo

After finishing a recording, pressing the [UNDO/

REDO] key returns to the condition just before re-

cording (Undo).

If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key again, you can

cancel the Undo operation and return back to the

condition after recording.

<Note>

The undo/redo function is available to any recording,

however, if you carry out any of the following operations

after recording, you cannot use the undo/redo function.

Therefore, if you are not satisfied with the recording,

press the

[UNDO/REDO]

key immediately to undo the

recording and make recording again.

* Making a new recording

* Making a new editing (copy, move, erase, auto punch

in/out, etc.)

* Turning off the power

* Executing program select, rename, and deleting

* Executing drive selection

Basic Recording/Playback

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

3 4 8 6 9

Stereo source

Basic recording (recording onto two tracks)

After recording onto track 1 as described in the previous section, let’s make recording of a stereo sound source

onto tracks 3 and 4.

Preparation for recording

Connect the [INPUT A] UNBAL and [INPUT B] UNBAL

jacks to the L and R outputs of the stereo source re-

spectively.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of Tracks

3 and 4.

The keys lighting in green change to flashing in red,

showing Tracks 3 and 4 are now armed. (The “Remain”

time is shown on the screen.)

The [CH ON/OFF] keys of INPUT A and B automatically

light in green.

Raise the faders of tracks 3 and 4 and [MASTER] fader

to “0” position.

This is preparation for monitoring sound. If both of

these faders are set at the minimum position, no sound

can be monitored.

Press the [RECORD] key.

The [RECORD] key starts flashing in red, while Tracks 3

and 4 (which are armed) changes to the input monitor

mode.

Use the [TRIM] knobs of INPUT A and B while playing

the stereo source to get proper gain.

Set the gain at maximum within the range in which the

[PEAK] indicator does not turn on.

You can monitor both the input level of Tracks 3 and 4

from the bar-graph meters on the screen.

Basic Recording/Playback

<Note>

Set the gain not to light the

[PEAK]

indicator.

When the

[PEAK]

indicator lights, the input level is

too high and the sound may be distorted or digital

noise may be generated.

In the condition above, if you turn the [PHONES] knob

clockwise, you can monitor the sound from the head-

phones.

<Warning!>

Be careful not to excessively raise the

[PHONE]

vol-

ume. Prolonged exposure to loud sounds may have

an adverse effect on hearing.

Recording

Locate the start position (time) for recording.

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the [RECORD]

key to start recording.

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of Tracks 3 and 4,

as well as the [RECORD] key light on, showing the VF80

is now recording.

You can see the meter for Track 1 also moving. By rais-

ing the Track 1 fader, you can make overdubbing onto

tracks 3 and 4 while listening to playback of track 1.

When the recorder starts running, the mark number

and name shown on the top line of the screen changes

as below, showing that the current position is ahead

of “ABS 0” point.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] key.

After showing “Please Wait!”, the LCD returns to the Nor-

mal screen.

To unarm tracks now recorded, press the flashing

[TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys again. The keys

changes to light in green.

Now you have recorded a stereo source onto two tracks

(3 and 4).

Playback

Locate the desired position (time) for playback.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

You can control track playback levels by using the cor-

responding track faders.

If you find that the recording was not successfully made,

use the undo/redo function and try recording again.

The playback level of each recorded track can be con-

trolled using the corresponding track fader.

You can mute the playback tracks by pressing the

corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys

except in the mix parameter edit mode.

The VF80 has 8 recordable tracks.

If you record materials onto all 8 tracks according

to the procedures described in “Basic recording”,

you cannot record further materials.

To record more materials, you can use the “track

bounce” technique to save tracks as follows:

1. Record materials onto tracks 1 through 6.

2. Mix the signals recorded on tracks 1 through

6 and record the mixed signal onto tracks 7 and

Then tracks 1 through 6 can be used to record

other materials.

This is the basic technique used for Multitrackers.

We recommend that tracks 7 and 8 are basically

used as the destination tracks of “track bounce”

from tracks 1 through 6.

See “Advanced Operation” for details about the track

bounce technique.

In addition, tracks 7 and 8 play an important role

in “training mode” and “mastering mode” described

later in “Advanced functions”.

The VF80 also provides the “track exchange” func-

tion which allows you to keep recordable tracks.

The VF80 has 16 additional tracks for each pro-

gram, in addition to 8 recordable (and playable)

real tracks (1 through 8). The “track exchange”

function allows you to exchange a real track and

an additional track, making the real track empty.

See page 56 “Recorder functions.”

Basic Recording/Playback

[ I] key

[I ] key

Mark function

The VF80 has the Mark function which allows you to set marks at the desired positions in a song.

You can locate a mark position immediately, as well as use mark positions for the punch in and out points, beginning

and end points for repeat and editing points for track editing such as copy, move, erase, etc.

This section describes how to set, delete and locate a mark. For details about editing a mark, see “Recorder func-

tions” described later.

Setting a mark on the fly

In the initial condition, Mark 00 is automatically en-

tered at the beginning of the current program (ABS

0) and named “ABS 0”.

You can enter up to 99 marks (Mark 01 through 99).

Mark number and name are shown on the Normal

screen as the arrow points in the screen example be-

low. (You cannot edit or delete Mark 00.)

During playback (or while stopped), press [| / MARK]

key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

“Entry Mark” is shown briefly and a mark is entered at

the current position.

Also the time marked is entered in the mark map list

(see “Recorder functions” for details).

To enter another mark, repeat step 1) above.

<Note>

Marks are assigned in ascending order of ABS time.

For example, even if you enter marks in order as shown

in the upper diagram below, the mark numbers are as-

signed as shown in the lower diagram.

Locating a mark

• Pressing [| ] key locates the previous mark.

In the example above, each time you press the key from

the current position, the recorder will locate Mark 03 ->

02 -> 01 -> 00.

• Pressing [ |] key locates the next mark.

In the example above, each time you press the key from

the current position, the recorder will locate Mark 04 ->

05 -> 06.

The current (located) mark number is shown on the

Normal screen.

Deleting a mark

You can delete unnecessary mark

While stopped, locate the mark to be deleted using the

[| ] or [ |] key.

The mark to be deleted is shown on the screen.

Press the [ |/DELETE] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

A pop-up panel asking for confirmation to delete the

current mark appears, in which “Sure?” blinks.

To cancel the operation for deletion, press the [EXIT/

NO] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The current mark is deleted.

You can locate a mark using the [| ] or [ |] key.

Current position

Basic Recording/Playback

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

TRIMTRIM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

REC EFF

[FOOT SW] jack

FOOT SW (Model 8051)

ABS locate functions

There are four types of the ABS locate functions as below.

• Pressing the [REWIND] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the beginning of the current program

(ABS 00), regardless of the time base setting.

• Pressing the [F FWD] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the end position of the last recording of the

current program (REC END).

You can use this function to locate the end point of a song or to check the length of a song.

• Pressing the [PLAY] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the beginning of the last playback.

• Pressing the [RECORD] key while holding down the [STOP] key locates the beginning of the last recording.

Punch in/out

If you are not satisfied with your recording and want to modify only a specific part, you can replace the part with

a new recording using the punch in/out technique.

“Punch in” switches the transport mode from playback to recording, while “Punch out” switches the transport

mode from recording to playback. The point at which a punch in is carried out is called a “punch in point”, while

the point at which a punch out is carried out is called a “punch out point.”

You can carry out the punch in/out operation in 3 ways:

* Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit

* Using the foot switch (Model 8051)

* Auto punch in/out function

After setting the punch in and out points, the punch

in/out can be took place automatically.

The following description is assumed that the track(s)

to be punched in/out are armed and the source input

level is set appropriately by using the [TRIM] knob.

Manual punch in/out using the keys on the unit

Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] key from a po-

sition before the punch in point.

When the playback position reaches the punch in point,

press the [RECORD] key while holding down the [PLAY]

key.

Only the armed track(s) switch from playback to record-

ing.

At the punch out point, press the [PLAY] key .

The armed track(s) switch from recording to playback.

Punch in/out using the foot switch

Connect the Model 8051 foot switch to the [FOOT SW]

jack.

Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] key from a po-

sition before the punch in point.

When the playback position reaches the punch in point,

step on the foot switch.

Only the armed track(s) switch from playback to record-

ing.

At the punch out point, step on the foot switch.

The armed track(s) switch from recording to playback.

<Note>

Do not power on the machine with non-specified foot

SW connected to the foot SW jack.

When powering on the machine with non-specified

foot SW (latch type foot SW, etc.) connected to the

foot SW jack, there is a case that the machine does

not correctly boot up with “No Drive!” alert message.

In such a case, power off the machine once, discon-

nect the foot SW and then power back on.

Basic Recording/Playback

During playback, this counter shows the current

recorder position in real time.

The time (or bar/beat) stored is shown here.

Flashing

Auto punch in/out function

You must set the punch in and out points before per-

forming auto punch in/out recording.

You can set the points either during playback and

while stopped. In the following description, we assume

that the “ABS” time base is selected.

• Setting the punch in/out points on the fly during playback

(or while stopped)

Press the [AUTO PUNCH/EDIT] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.

At the point at which you want to set the punch in point,

press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

“In Point Stored!” appears briefly, and the point is stored

as the punch in point.

At the point at which you want to set the punch out point,

press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

“Out Point Stored!” appears briefly, and the point at which

you carry out the operation above is stored as the punch

out point.

<Note>

Set the punch in point earlier than the punch out point.

• Setting the punch in/out points numerically

While the recorder is stopped, you can set the in and

out points by entering the time numerically.

While stopped, press the [AUTO PUNCH/EDIT] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while the punch in point

value is highlighted on the screen as above.

Now you can edit the punch in point value.

Initially, the “seconds” value starts blinking, showing

that it can be edited.

Move the blinking value by using the [CURSOR / ]

key and enter the desired value using the [JOG] dial.

After completing editing the time value, press the [EN-

TER/YES] key.

The edited time is stored as the punch in point.

Use the [CURSOR down] key to highlight the punch out

point value, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Now you can edit the punch out point value.

Flashing

Enter the desired value with the same method as en-

tering the punch in point, then press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The edited time is stored as the punch out point.

After storing times for both points, press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

The LCD returns to the Normal screen.

Basic Recording/Playback

Showing a mark.

Blinking

• Taking a mark point in the punch in or punch out point

You can take a mark point in the punch in or out point.

<Note>

The following operation is possible only when any marks

are stored using the Mark function described earlier.

Press the [AUTO PUNCH/EDIT] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for setting the punch in/out points appears.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key when the in point time

value is highlighted (as above).

The highlighted line changes to show a mark.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The highlighted mark starts blinking.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark, and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected mark position is taken in the punch

in point.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the punch out

point value, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark, and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected mark position is taken in the punch out

point.

After setting both points, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

• Performing auto punch in/out recording

After storing the punch in and out points, you can

perform the auto punch in/out recording.

Press the [AUTO PUNCH /EDIT] key (to illuminate the

key).

The auto punch mode is now active.

Locate the earlier position to the punch in point.

Press the [RECORD] key while holding down the

[PLAY] key.

A “take” of auto punch in/out recording starts and

“TAKE” lights up on the screen.

The recorder starts playback, and then automatically

puts into the record mode at the punch in point. It

automatically switches to playback at the punch out

point.

In the step 3) above, if you press only the [PLAY] key,

a “rehearsal” of auto punch in/out recording starts

and “RHSL” lights up on the screen.

In the rehearsal mode, when the recorder reaches

the punch in point, only the monitor of the armed

track(s) switches to “Input monitor” without perform-

ing actual recording.

You can rehearse as many times as you like before

actual recording.

Hint:

If you use the loop function together with the re-

hearsal mode, you can rehearse your playing re-

peatedly without the need of the recorder opera-

tion, allowing you to concentrate on your playing.

See “Recorder functions” for details about the loop

function.

Basic Recording/Playback

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

EDIT

REC EFF

[PAN] key

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPA N

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

EDIT

REC EFF

[EQ] key

Flashing

Mixing

After recording all tracks (1 through 8), you can tailor the sound of each track. The following describes about

settings for level, pan, EQ and effects.

Adjusting levels

Adjust the playback level of each track using the cor-

responding fader (1 through 6 and 7/8).

The levels of tracks 7 and 8 are simultaneously con-

trolled by a single fader (7/8).

Adjust the stereo master output (ST OUT L/R) levels

using the [MASTER] fader.

You can view the stereo master output (L/R) levels

from the L/R level meters on the screen. The output

levels are affected by the [MASTER] fader position.

Be sure not to set the fader level too high to avoid

the sound distorted.

Setting pan position

You can set the pan position of each track.

Press the [PAN] key.

The pan setting screen is shown, where “Select TRK!” is

flashing in the initial condition.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the de-

sired track (or use the [CURSOR / ] keys to select

the desired track).

The pan icon of the selected track is highlighted, show-

ing that it is editable.

highlighted

Flashing

highlighted

Set the pan position using the [JOG] dial.

The pan icon on the screen changes in real time accord-

ing to the rotation of the [JOG] dial.

Repeat steps 2) and 3) to set other tracks.

After completing the pan setting, press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

The LCD returns to the Normal screen.

Adjusting EQ

Press the [EQ] key.

The EQ screen is shown, where “Select TRK!” is flashing

in the initial condition.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the de-

sired track.

The default preset library entry (“L00: 2-SHLV”) is

shown, in which the High Gain field is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited.

<Selecting from the EQ library>:

There are 36 presets besides the default preset in the

EQ library. You can select a desired preset accord-

ing to the situation and tailor the sound. See “Mixer

functions” for details.

Edit the “Hi Gain” value using the [JOG] dial.

The EQ curve is shown according to the value setting,

while the sound changes in real time.

You can set the value between -18 dB and + 18 dB.

Basic Recording/Playback

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

BOUNCE

EDIT

REC EFF

[EFFECT] key

Flashing

Highlight the “Lo Gain” field by using the [CURSOR ]

key, and edit the “Lo Gain” value using the [JOG] dial.

You can set the value between -18 dB and + 18 dB, as

same as the Hi Gain.

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to edit EQ on other tracks.

After completing the EQ setting, press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

The LCD returns to the Normal screen.

Setting effects

Press the [EFFECT] key.

The effect send level setting screen appears initially.

Each press of the [EFFECT] key switches between the

effect send level setting screen, effect type selection

screen and effect send pre/post selection screen.

Effect send level setting

While the effect send level setting screen is shown,

press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the

desired track.

The effect knob icon of the selected track is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited. The default value for track

sends 1 through 6 is “0” while the default value for the

master is “80”.

Use the [JOG] dial to enter the send level.

While the send level changes, the corresponding icon

also changes in real time.

When the value increases, the effect sound of the cur-

rently selected effect type will be output.

To set the effect send levels for other tracks, carry out

step 2 and 3 above repeatedly.

Effect type setting

The VF80 provides 38 effect types (L01 through L38) used

for the loop effect and 6 effect types (L39 through L44) used

for the insert effect.

Bring up the effect type setting screen and select the

desired effect type by rotating the [JOG] dial.

While rotating the [JOG] dial, the effect type appears

one after the other among 38 types (L01 ~ L38).

After selecting the desired effect type, press the [EN-

TER/YES] key.

The selected effect type is set.

Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the effect send level

setting screen.

Adjust the effect send levels as described above.

All the effect sends from tracks 1 through 6 are

initially set to “post-fader”. Therefore, when a track

fader is completely down, no signal is sent even if

you raise the effect send level of the track.

You can also select “pre-fader” if necessary.

See “Mixer functions” for details.

You can set parameters for the selected effect type.

See “Mixer functions” for details about parameter

setting.

You can switch on or off the effect alternately by

pressing the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding

down the [SHIFT] key.

See “Mixer functions” for details.

highlighted

There are two methods for using the internal effect

processor of the VF80: “loop effect” and “insert effect”.

The following describes how to set the send level and

select an effect type of the loop effect.

See “Mixer Function” for details about the loop effect,

such as how to make pre/post setting of an effect send

or how to set effect parameters.

See also “Advanced Operations” on page 83 for details

about the insert effect. Highlighted

<Note>

If you select an effect type used for the insert effect

(i.e. any one of L39 through L44), the screens for

effect type selection and effect send pre/post selec-

tion are not shown.

Basic Recording/Playback

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

TRIMTRIM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

REC EFF

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

Analog master recorder

Digital master recorder

Mixdown

After tailoring sound of all the tracks, let’s make a master tape (disc) using your master recorder (cassette, DAT,

MD, etc.). As the VF80 can feed the stereo outputs (L and R) via the S/PDIF (coaxial) digital output jack, you can

make the master tape (disc) in digital domain if your recorder provides a digital input jack. If your digital re-

corder only provides the optical input jack, use the Fostex COP-1 optical to coaxial converter.

The VF80 provides the “mastering mode” and “internal

mastering mode”.

In the mastering mode, you can record a material mixed

down to track 7 and 8 to an external master recorder,

while applying sound processing. The mastering mode

allows you to perform advanced mastering.

See “Advanced Operations” on page 76 for details about the

mastering mode.

In the internal mastering mode, you can create a master song

inside the VF80, without the need of using an external

master recorder. Also, you can create an audio CD from

master materials mastered in the mastering mode. (Note

that you need the optional CD-RW drive to create an audio

CD.)

See “Advanced Operations” on page 79 for details about the

internal mastering mode, and “Save/load of song data” on

page 115 for details about creating an audio CD.

Analog mixdown

Connect the [ST OUT - L/R] jacks to the input jacks of

your analog master recorder.

Set the recording level of the master recorder.

Start recording the master recorder, and start playback

of the VF80 from the beginning of the song.

When recording finishes, stop both the units.

You can fade in or fade out a song by using the [MASTER]

fader.

Connect the [DATA OUTPUT] jack to the digital input

jack of your master recorder.

Set the master recorder’s recording source to the digi-

tal input.

• The sampling frequency of the VF80 is fixed to 44.1

kHz, so you cannot record the VF80 digital output

signal to the master recorder that cannot accept 44.1

kHz digital signals.

• In general, you cannot adjust the digital input level

of a digital recorder.

Adjust the stereo output level of the VF80 using the

[MASTER] fader.

• In general, set the fader so that the level meter on the

master recorder indicates “0” when the VF80 feeds

the loudest level signal.

If the level is too high, the sound may be distorted.

Start recording the master recorder, and start playback

of the VF80 from the beginning of the song.

When recording finishes, stop both the units.

Digital mixdown

Mixer Functions

Normal screen

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

Lighting in green

Lighting in orange

Mixer Functions

Initial condition when turning on the power

When turning on the power, the VF80 starts up while showing the unit information on the LCD display and then

gets ready when the screen below appears. This screen is called "Normal Screen", in which the program number

and current recorder position are shown. In the following example (the default), Program 1 (P01) is loaded and

the current position is the beginning (ABS 00M 00S).

Operations while the Normal screen is shown

Fader

The fader for each track (1 through 6 and 7/8) con-

trols the level of the playback signal fed to the stereo

outputs.

Track mute

While the VF80 is not in the mix parameter edit mode,

pressing any one of the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

keys (for tracks 1 through 6 and 7/8) mutes the cor-

responding track.

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for the muted

track is unlit. Pressing the key again releases muting

and lights up the key.

Master fader mute

While the VF80 is not in the mix parameter edit mode,

pressing the [STATUS/SEL] key for the master fader

mutes the stereo outputs.

While the stereo outputs are muted, the [STATUS/SEL]

key is unlit. Pressing the key again releases muting

and lights up the key.

Mixer Functions

Flashing

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

MIX PARAMETER

FADER MAP

ON/OFF

Mix parameter section

The Mix parameter section provides five keys that are used for mixer function settings.

By pressing one of these keys alone or while holding down the [SHIFT] key, you can execute the following.

•Pan setting

•EQ setting

•Effect send level setting

•Effect send pre/post setting

•Effect type/parameter setting

•Effect on/off setting

•Save/load/delete of a scene memory

•Scene sequence mode on/off setting

•Mark map setting

•Fader view

Adjusting pan positions

You can adjust the pan position of each track signal fed to the stereo outputs.

Press the [PAN] key.

The pan screen appears.

If you have not edited any track parameter for pan, EQ

or effect send setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes, as well as all the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] keys on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for pan, EQ or

effect send setting after turning on the power last time,

the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited.

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The pan icon of the selected track is highlighted, indi-

cating that you can edit it.

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of the selected track

flashes.

Highlighted

Use the [JOG] dial to adjust the pan position.

The pan position is set according to the rotating degree.

The following show examples of the pan settings.

•Controllable tracks

Tracks 1 through 6 and 7/8

•Available values

L10 (hard left) through C (center) to R10 (hard right)

(the default setting: "C" for all tracks)

Pan position:

center Pan position:

hard left

Pan position:

hard right

To adjust the pan position for another track, repeat

steps 2 and 3 above.

After completing pan setting, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The VF80 exits the mix parameter edit mode and the

LCD display returns to the Normal screen.

<Note>

The VF80 mixer channels always receive corresponding track signals. They do not receive input signals.

Mixer Functions

Flashing

Editing EQ

The VF80 is equipped with 2-band (HI and LO) EQ for Tracks 1 through 6.

36 preset entries are available in the EQ library.

<Note>

You can apply EQ only to Tracks 1 through 6. You cannot

apply EQ to Tracks 7/8.

Press the [EQ] key.

The EQ screen appears.

If you have not edited any track parameter for EQ, pan

or effect send setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes, as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for pan, EQ or

effect send setting after turning on the power last time,

the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited.

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The selected track number and library entry name

(shown as "EQ-1" and "L00: 2-SHLV" respectively in the

screen example below) are shown, together with the

current settings. The gain value of Hi EQ ("Hi Gain")

flashes, indicating that you can edit it.

Use the [CURSOR / ] key to select a parameter to

be edited.

Each time you press the [CURSOR ] key, the flashing

parameter (to be edited) changes in the following or-

der. Hi Gain -> Lo Gain -> EQ ON/OFF -> library entry

->Hi Gain...

Pressing the [CURSOR ] key changes the flashing pa-

rameter in the reverse order.

Use the [JOG] dial to edit the parameter value.

The following values are available for each parameter.

Hi Gain

Lo Gain

ON/OFF

-18 dB through 0 dB to +18 dB in 1 dB steps.

The current EQ curve is shown graphically accord-

ing to the current values.

-18 dB through 0 dB to +18 dB in 1 dB steps.

The current EQ curve is shown graphically accord-

ing to the current values.

ON or OFF of EQ

Library

Selectable from 36 preset library entries (L00

through L36). The default is "L00: 2-SHLV.

After selecting the desired library, press the [EN-

TER/YES] key to confirm the setting.

*See the following table for details about the EQ

library.

Setting example 1: Set "Hi Gain" to "+11 dB."

The high frequency gain is boosted up as shown graphi-

cally.

Setting example 2: Set "Lo Gain" to "-8 dB."

The low frequency gain is cut as shown graphically.

Setting example 3: Set "EQ library" to "L03."

The high frequency gain is boosted up as shown graphi-

cally.

By using the [JOG] dial to select "L03": Ana.Kick" and

pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, the preset parameter

values are shown together with the corresponding EQ

curve.

You can edit parameters from this preset condition and

store the setting as a scene. Note that if you turn off

the power, the setting is cleared.

To edit the EQ for another track, repeat steps 2 through

After completing EQ editing, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The VF80 exits the EQ edit mode and the LCD display

returns to the Normal screen.

Flashing

Mixer Functions

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+6.0 -12.0

400Hz 600Hz

L-S 5.0

L01: LightKick

Creates a light and jaunty kick

sound

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+7.0 +10.0

400Hz 4kHz

L-S 8.0

L02: TightKick

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+5.0 -9.0

550Hz 6kHz

L-S H-S

L03: Ana.Kick

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-7.0 +6.0

1kHz 3.5kHz

L-S 2.5

L04: Snappy_SD

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+8.0 +5.0

150Hz 3.5kHz

4.5 2.5

L05: Power_SD

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+3.0 +4.0

550Hz 4.3kHz

4.5 2.2

L06: Deep_SD

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+4.0 +7.0

100Hz 3.2kHz

7.1 6.3

L07: Talk_Tom

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+6.0 -12.0

100Hz 1.7kHz

2.8 2.2

L08: Melo.Tom

Creates a tight and hard kick sound.

Makes an analog kick sound boomy.

Makes a snare sound snappier.

Creates a powerful and heavy snare

sound.

Creates a heavy sound of a snare

drum with a deep body.

Creates a skinny tom-tom sound.

Creates a melodious sound.

Flat setting

The first time you bring up the EQ

screen, this entry is selected.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

400Hz 4kHz

L-S H-S

L00: 2-SHLV

Removes the brightness from a

cymbal sound by cutting high fre-

quencies.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+3.0 -18.0

300Hz 8kHz

1.6 H-S

L10: Lo-Fi_Cym

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-4.0 +7.0

100Hz 6kHz

L-S H-S

L11: Perc.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-8.0 +10.0

360Hz 5.4kHz

L-S H-S

L12: Tamb.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+5.0 +3.0

100Hz 2.4kHz

0.1 6.3

L13: Fat_Bass

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+5.0 +4.0

190Hz 2.4kHz

1.0 1.0

L14: Norm.Bass

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+4.0 +3.0

120Hz 1.3kHz

2.0 2.2

L15: Loud_Bass

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-3.0 +4.0

340Hz 5kHz

0.9 H-S

L16: Bright_Pf

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+5.0 -3.0

200Hz 1.3kHz

L-S 0.9

L17: Loud_Pf

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-13.0 +7.0

170Hz 5.4kHz

0.7 1.1

L18: Power_Pf

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+8.0 +3.0

1kHz 6.4kHz

0.7 1.7

L19: E.Pf

Creates a bright sound by empha-

sizing the attack of a conga, bongo,

etc.

Creates a subtle sound by empha-

sizing the presence of a tambourine,

etc.

Creates a fat base sound by slightly

boosting the low frequency range.

Creates a all-round bass sound.

Creates a good analog bass sound

by boosting the low frequency range

and emphasizing the attack.

Creates a bright piano sound.

Creates a rich piano sound by

boosting the low frequency range

which contains rich harmonics.

Creates a tight and smooth sound.

Suitable for a piano solo.

Creates a sound which emphasizes

the attack and distortion when hit-

ting keyboards of an electric piano.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-10.0 +17.0

130Hz 520Hz

L-S 7.1

L09: W.GongTom

Makes a tom-tom sound woody.

Preset entries in the EQ library

Mixer Functions

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-5.0 +4.0

170Hz 5.8kHz

0.7 H-S

L31: Female_Vo

Effective for a whole chorus part by

emphasizing the high frequency

range.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-5.0 +5.0

120Hz 10kHz

0.7 H-S

L32: Chorus

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

ON +3.0

180Hz 10kHz

HPF H-S

L33: SpeeCh

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+5.0 +6.0

100Hz 12kHz

L-S H-S

L34: Digi.Mix

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

ON ON

250Hz 8kHz

HPF LPF

L35: AnalogMix

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

ON ON

1.2kHz 5.6kHz

HPF LPF

L36: Telephone

Effective for a female vocal

Makes a narration clear.

Makes an analog open-reel or cas-

sette tape sound closer to a digital

sound.

Cuts the high frequency range and

provides an opposite character to

L34.

Emphasizes the mid range only to

provide a telephone receiver sound.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-4.0 +4.0

100Hz 6.6kHz

L-S H-S

L20: Clean_EG

Makes a moderately distorted

crunch electric guitar sound distinc-

tive.

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-2.0 +6.0

120Hz 4kHz

0.7 1.4

L21: CrunCh_EG

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+6.0 +7.0

310Hz 1.3kHz

1.5 1.1

L22: OverDrvEG

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+6.0 +4.0

370Hz 3.6kHz

L-S 10

L23: Dist.EG

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+3.0 +12.0

230Hz 14kHz

0.7 H-S

L24: Metal_EG

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-9.0 +8.0

100Hz 9kHz

0.7 1.2

L25: Stroke_AG

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-2.0 +3.0

210Hz 9.4kHz

L-S 0.1

L26: Arpeg.EAG

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-7.0 +5.0

530Hz 4.4kHz

7.1 H-S

L27: Arpeg.AG

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+3.0 +4.0

125Hz 260Hz

L-S 2.2

L29: W.WindSec

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

+2.0 +3.0

2kHz 6.2kHz

0.5 H-S

L30: Male_Vo

Adds a bright character to a trans-

parent and clean electric guitar

sound.

Makes a mellow overdriven electric

guitar sound fatter.

Makes a hardly distorted electric

guitar sound distinctive.

Makes a high-gain metal sound dis-

tinctive.

Suppresses a hole resonance of an

acoustic guitar and makes a code

stroke sound powerful.

Controls the arpeggio code balance

of an electro-acoustic guitar.

Suppresses a hole resonance of an

acoustic guitar and makes an ar-

peggio brighter.

Controls the balance of brass instru-

ments (such as trumpets, trom-

bones. etc.).

Makes the mid frequency range of

woodwind instruments (such as

clarinets, oboe, etc.) richer.

Effective for a male vocal

Gain

Freq.

LO HI

-3.0 +4.0

100Hz 5.6kHz

2.5 5.0

L28: Brass_Sec

Tips:

“L-S” (Low shelving type)

This equalizer affects all frequencies below a specified

frequency when applying boost or cut.

“H-S” (High shelving type)

This equalizer affects all frequencies below a specified

frequency when applying boost or cut.

“LPF” (Low pass filter)

This filter passes frequencies below a cut-off frequency

while cuts frequencies above the frequency.

“HPF” (High pass filter)

This filter passes frequencies below a cut-off frequency

while cuts frequencies above the frequency.

Mixer Functions

Setting Effects

The VF80 provides 38 digital effect types used for the loop effect and 6 types used for the insert effect.

As you can select any type and adjust parameter settings for each type, comprehensive effect pro-

cessing is possible.

Employing the Fostex A.S.P. (Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology*), the internal DSP multi-

effect processor realizes superb ambience effects. In addition, the newly developed "A.S.P. +" achieves

simulations of microphones/amplifiers with overwhelming reality.

* A. S. P. (Fostex Advanced Signal Processing Technology)

The A. S. P. is an exclusive new digital effect processing technology designed by Fostex.

This method extracts maximum efficiency from the limited DSP power.

It achieves an overwhelmingly high density Early Reflection sound and wonderfully smooth

High Dump response through the H. F. A. (Harmonic Feedback Algorithm). Also, it car-

ries out an elaborate reverb simulation with clear sounds through the H. D. L. P. (Hi-

Density Logarithmic Processing), which eliminates the mutual interference between the

numerous integrated delay modules and reduce the impurity and girt of the sound.

* H. F. A. (Harmonic Feedback Algorithm)

There is one of indispensable elements in the natural echo called “Early Reflection Sound,” which is usually

sacrificed in commercial reverb products in order to reduce costs. (In practice, the Early Reflection Sound

means the very first reverberated sound that bounces back from walls, floors and ceilings of concert halls).

The entire reverb sound quality depends on this Early Reflection Sound and how closely it can resemble the

real echo. The H. F. A. is an algorithm that enables the effect unit to reproduce a clear and natural Early

Reflection Sound by applying an ideal harmonic feedback to each delay module.

* H. D. L. P. (Hi-Density Logarithmic Processing)

The reverb sounds consist of lots of small delay elements combined in a complex way, which are produced

by many delay modules inside the effect unit. In order to obtain smooth and comfortable reverb sounds,

it is very important to efficiently organize the relationship between each delay module and minimize

negative mutual interference. The H. D. L. P. is a technology which applies efficient logarithmic processing

to each delay module, so that they can work in the most efficient way in order to eliminate harmful reverb

elements and roughness. This makes it possible to establish high density and transparent sounds.

Using a loop effect you can process sound recorded on tracks during track bouncing (ping-pong) or mixdown.

The processed sound is recorded to the other track(s) of the unit or external master recorder.

Using an insert effect, you can process sound on any of tracks 1 through 6 using a distortion or simulation

effect, and rerecord the processed sound to the same track.

About "A.S.P.+"

Combining the ambience effect technology established through the development of "A.P.S."with acoustic

theories accumulated through the development of transducers such as monitor speakers for many years,

Fostex developed a unique simulation algorithm engine called "A.S.P.+", which performs overwhelmingly

realistic microphone/amplifier simulation.

To simulate a microphone, the frequency response of the microphone, which is the most essential factor

that decides the sound character of each famous/popular microphone, must be reproduced correctly. To

get this, "A.P.S.+" carries out a double accuracy operation for each frequency range using the unique "D.A.O."

(Double Accuracy Operation).

Regarding a guitar amplifier, the peak and dip of the specific frequencies, as well as feedback of the peak

frequency's harmonics, are the most essential factors that decide the sound character of each famous/popular

amplifier. To simulate such a unique character, "A.P.S.+" carries out a double accuracy operation for each

frequency range using the "D.A.O." (Double Accuracy Operation) to simulate the frequency curve, as well

as carries out harmonics feedback processing using the "H.F.A." (Harmonics Feedback Algorithm).

Mixer Functions

How to make the loop effect setting

There are two methods for using the internal effect processor of the VF80; "loop effect" and "insert

effect".

The loop effect allows you to apply a desired effect to track signals during track bounce (ping-pong)

operation to the other tracks or mixdown operation to an external master recorder.

The insert effect is applied when rerecording any of recorded tracks 1 through 6.

The following describes how to make settings for the loop effect. See "Advanced Operations" on page

83 for details about the insert effect.

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

ASP

Effect

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

ASP

Effect Master Recorder

Bouncing tracks 1 through 6 to tracks 7 and

Mixing down tracks 1 through 6 and recording to an external

master recorder.

Before describing detail for the VF80 effect setting, we briefly explain each effect type (reverb, delay,

chorus, flanger, distortion and simulator).

Reverb:

The so called Reverb effect consists of various reflection

sounds mixed together. For example, when you clap your

hands in a tunnel, you will hear the sound linger even

after you stop clapping your hands. This is the Reverb.

The sounds we normally hear in daily life have three types

of sounds mixed together, i.e., “Direct sound,” “Early Re-

flection sound” and “Late Reflection sound.”

The Direct sound means the sound directly reaches the

ears from the sound source. The Early Reflection sound

means the sound that comes after the Direct sound and

has rebound off the wall of the tunnel up to a few times.

The Late Reflection sound means that the sound rebounds

many times long after the Direct sound has disappeared.

Our ears normally hear the “Direct sound” - “Early Reflec-

tion sound” - “Late Reflection sound” in the order.

Delay:

This is the effect to added a delayed sound to the original

sound. You can obtain a richer sound or completely change

the original source sound by using the Delay.

<Note>

The effect settings described here are only available to Tracks 1 through 6.

On Track 7/8, the dedicated "

Mastering processing"

is built in and you can apply the reverb, compressor, etc. while trans-

ferring audio on the master tracks (7/8) to an external recorder. See "

Advanced Operations

" for details.

Chorus:

This makes the one original sound appear to have many

sources. The Chorus is used to widen or thicken the origi-

nal sound.

Flanger:

The Flanger is one of applications of the Delay.

This is used to create a sound like a jet airplane ascending

or descending.

Distortion:

The distortion effect distorts the sound and adds harmon-

ics. Four types of the distortion effect are provided: the guitar

distortion, bass distortion, drum distortion and voice dis-

tortion. The distortion is used for the insert effect.

Simulation:

Simulators for famous guitar amplifiers and microphones

are provided. You can get a familiar distortion sound of a

famous guitar amplifier or a popular microphone sound. A

simulator can be used for the insert effect.

Mixer Functions

Flashing

Setting effect send levels

You can set send levels from Tracks 1 through 6 to the

internal A.S.P. effect processor.

Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the send level

setting screen.

If you have not edited any track parameter for effect

send, EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes, as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for effect send,

EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last time,

the icon for the previously edited track is highlighted,

showing that it can be edited.

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The icon of the selected track is highlighted, indicat-

ing that you can edit it.

In the default settings, the send levels for Tracks 1

through 6 are "00" while the level for Master is "80."

Use the [JOG] dial to adjust the send level value.

The knob icon also rotates according to the level value.

When the level is set to "00", no signal is sent to the effect

processor.

• Editable tracks: Tracks 1 through 6

• Level range: 00 through 99 in 1 step

• Default level: Tracks 1 through 6: 00, Master: 80

To edit the send level for another track, repeat steps 2

and 3 above.

To edit the effect send master level, press the [STA-

TUS/SEL] key of the master to highlight the master

level icon, and then use the [JOG] dial to edit the value.

The default level value is "80."

After completing send level settings, press the [EXIT/

NO] key.

The LCD display returns to the Normal screen.

Effect send level setting screen

Effect type/parameter setting screen

Effect send pre/post setting screen

<Hint>

When editing the loop effect setting, pressing the

[EFFECT] key after turning on the power cycles

the screen between "Effect send level setting

screen", "Effect type/parameter setting screen" and

"Effect send pre/post setting screen", as shown

right.

<Note>

If you select one of effect types L39 through

L44, the "Effect type/parameter setting

screen" is shown and pressing the

[EFFECT]

key does not change the screen.

This is because effect types L39 through L44

are only used as insert effects and do not have

the "Effect send level setting screen" and

"Effect send pre/post setting screen"

See "Advanced Operations" on page 83 for

details about the insert effect.

Mixer Functions

Selecting an effect type

Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the effect type/

parameter setting screen.

The first time you bring up the screen, "L01: Norm HALL"

is selected as the effect type.

From the second time on when bringing up the screen,

the previously selected effect type is selected.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired effect type.

For the loop effect, you can select among L01 through

L38.

Effect types L39 through L44 are used for the insert

effect (described later).

When you select a type other than the current type, the

type flashes.

Edit point

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting the effect

type.

Now you can edit the first parameter.

In the example below, the "Eff Level" value is highlighted

showing that it can be edited.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a value for the highlighted

parameter.

See "Effect parameter details" about the available pa-

rameter values.

To set a value for another parameter, use the [CURSOR

] key to select a parameter to be edited, and then use

the [JOG] dial to select a value.

After completing the settings, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The VF80 exits the edit mode and the LCD display re-

turns to the Normal screen.

<Note>

Changing the effect preset may mute the sound mo-

mentarily!

Effect presets of the internal effect processor shown

above are classified into three types; ambience/de-

lay type (No. 1 through 28), modulation/pitch type

(No. 29 through 36), pitch type (No. 37 and 38) and

distortion/simulation type (No. 39 through 44).

If you switch the effect preset between the three types

above, the audio is momentarily muted.

• Selectable tracks: Tracks 1 through 6

• Setting values: PRE or POST (the default is POST).

Pre fader signal is sent to the effect processor.

Post fader signal is sent to the effect processor.

Flashing

Selecting Pre/Post of the effect send

You can select the send signals from Tracks 1 through

6 pre- or post- fader.

When selecting Post, a signal after the track fader is

sent to the effect processor. So if you set the fader

completely down, no signal is sent to the effect pro-

cessor.

When selecting Pre, a signal before the track fader is

sent to the effect processor. So even if you set the fader

completely down, the signal is sent to the effect pro-

cessor.

Press the [EFFECT] key to bring up the pre/post set-

ting screen.

If you have not edited any track parameter for effect

send, EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last

time, the message prompting to select a track ("Select

TRK!") flashes,as well as the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

keys for Tracks 1 through 6 on the panel flash.

If you have edited any track parameter for effect send,

EQ or pan setting after turning on the power last time,

the switch icon for the previously edited track is high-

lighted, showing that it can be edited.

Select the desired track by pressing the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key (or using the

[CURSOR / ] keys).

The switch icon of the selected track is highlighted,

indicating that you can edit it.

In the default settings, all Tracks 1 through 6 are set to

"Post."

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Pre" or "Post."

The icon changes according to the selection as below.

Mixer Functions

Turning the effect processor on or off

You can select the on or off of the effect processor.

• To turn on the effect processor

Press the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to illuminate the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key.

The effect processor is turned on and you can hear "wet"

sound.

• To turn off the effect processor

Press the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to illuminate the [EFFECT/ON/OFF] key.

The effect processor is turned off and you can hear "dry"

sound.

You can also see the on/off status of the effect proces-

sor in the effect type/parameter setting screen.

This icon shows the on/off status of the effect processor.

Mixer Functions

Name Parameter type Explanation

L01 Norm HALL REVERB Standard hall reverb; detailed and transparent, with a moderate amount of early reflections.

L02 Pres HALL REVERB Hall reverb with presence and definition.

L03 Wet HALL REVERB Hall reverb with restrained high-frequency and a refreshing atmosphere.

L04 NoER HALL REVERB All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and even decay of all frequencies.

L05 Lo-F HALL REVERB Hall reverb with lingering low-frequency reverberation.

L06 STADIUM REVERB Stadium reverb characterized by long early reflections.

L07 AUDITRIUM REVERB Reverb simulating an auditorium with suppressed reverberation.

L08 HALL WAY REVERB Reverb with a long pre-delay, creating the impression of an extended space.

L09 Norm ROOM REVERB Room reverb simulating a moderate space with some sparkle.

L10 Dead ROOM REVERB Room reverb simulating a narrow and dead room. Adding a slight amount will give warmth to the sound.

L11 Pres ROOM REVERB All-purpose room reverb, with good definition and few early reflections.

L12 DrumBOOTH REVERB Room reverb simulating a drum booth.

L13 GARAGE REVERB Room reverb simulating a narrow and live space like a garage, with crisp presence.

L14 NormPLATE REVERB Modern-sounding plate reverb with wide bandwidth.

L15 Old PLATE REVERB Standard plate reverb with the character of older plate units.

L16 PresPLATE REVERB Plate reverb with good definition and extended high-frequencies.

L17 Wet PLATE REVERB Plate reverb with a gentle character.

L18 DigiPLATE REVERB Plate reverb that emphasizes a digital character, with metallic early reflections.

L19 NormVOCAL REVERB All-purpose hall reverb with no early reflections, and uniform decay at all frequencies.

L20 PresVOCAL REVERB Short reverberation with extended high frequency is added to the early reflections of an ideal vocal booth. Since

this adds sparkle to the sound, it is effective when you wish to bring the vocal to the forefront.

L21 SoloVOCAL REVERB Plate-like reverb is added to a spacious short delay. This blends well with any genre of music.

L22 Arena VOC REVERB Gentle reverb is added to spacious stadium-type early reflections.

L23 Arena CHO REVERB Short reverb with extended high frequency is added to spacious stadium-type early reflections. Effective on

chorus parts.

L24 KARAOKE REVERB All-purpose reverb (karaoke style) that makes any vocal sound professional.

L25 MnDL-HALL DLY+REVERB A combined effect of mono delay and hall reverb.

L26 MnDL-PLT DLY+REVERB A combined effect of mono delay and plate reverb.

L27 PnDL-HALL DLY+REVERB A combined effect of panning delay and hall reverb.

L28 PnDL-PLT DLY+REVERB A combined effect of panning delay and plate reverb.

L29 MonoDELAY DELAY Mono delay

L30 PanDELAY DELAY Panning delay

L31 MonoBpmDL BPM DELAY Mono delay. Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time.

L32 PanBpmDL BPM DELAY Panning delay. Specify BPM and note value to set the delay time.

L33 Short DL SHORT DELAY Short delay that allows you to set the delay time precisely.

L34 DOUBLING DOUBLING Doubling that allows you to set separate delay times for L and R.

L35 CHORUS CHORUS Produces a chorus effect. A doubling effect can also be added.

L36 FLANGE FLANGE Produces a flanging effect.

L37 MonoPITCH MONO PITCH Pitch shift adjustable in a +/-2 octave range.

L38 DlyPITCH DELAY PITCH Pitch shift with a feedback delay, allowing strange effects to be produced.

L39 Dist Gtr DISTORTION Distortion sound for a guitar. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 83.)

L40 Dist Bass DISTORTION Distortion sound for a bass. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 83.)

L41 Dist Drum DISTORTION Distortion sound for drums. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 83.)

L42 Dist Voice DISTORTION Distortion sound for a voice. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 83.)

L43 Gtr Amp Sim SIMULATION You can simulates popular guitar amplifier sounds. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 83.)

L44 Mic Sim SIMULATION You can simulates famous microphone sounds. (See "Advanced Operations" on page 83.)

About the effect types

Effect types L01 through L38 are used for the loop effect, while L39 through L44 are used for the insert effect.

Mixer Functions

Effect parameter details

The parameters that can be adjusted will depend on the parameter type.

The following describes parameters for effect types L01 through L38 used for the loop effect.

See "Advanced Operations" on page 83 for details about parameters for effect types L39 through L44 used for

the insert effect.

Reverb effect parameters (parameter type: REVERB)

For effect types 1--24 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Rev Time Adjust the length of reverberation. Range: 0.1--9.9 seconds

3. Pre Delay Adjust the time from the original sound until reverberation begins. Range: 0--100 ms

4. Hi Ratio Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10

5. E/R Level Adjust the volume of the early reflections. Range: 0--99

Delay+reverb effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY+REVERB)

For effect types 25--28 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Delay Time Adjust the delay time: Range: 1--230 ms

3. Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

4. Delay Bal Adjust the delay balance. Range: 0--99

5. Rev Time Adjust the length of reverberation. Range: 0.1--9.9 seconds

Delay effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY)

For effect types 29 and 30 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Delay Time Adjust the delay time. Range: 1--680 ms

3. Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

4. Hi Ratio Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10

5. Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

*L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

*H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

BPM delay effect parameters (parameter type: BPM DELAY)

For effect types 31 and 32 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. BPM Adjust the BPM. Range: 30--250 bpm

3. Note Select the note value for the delay. Range: 24, 16, 8T, 16...8, 4T, 8., 4, 2T, 4., 2, 2., 1

*24 = 16th note sextuplets, 16 = 16th notes, 8T = 8th note triplets, 16. = dotted sixteenth notes,

8 = 8th notes, 4T = quarter note triplets, 8. = dotted eighth notes,

4 = quarter notes, 2T = half-note triplets, 4. = dotted quarter notes, 2 = half notes

* The "." shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a dotted note.

* The "T" shown in the ninth character of the LCD indicates a triplet.

4. Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99 (100 steps in increments of 1)

5. Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

*L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

*H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Short delay effect parameters (parameter type: SHORT DELAY)

For effect type 33 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Delay Time Adjust the delay time. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99 ms, 100--200 ms

3. Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

4. Hi Ratio Adjust the decay ratio of the high frequencies. Range: 0--10

5. Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

*L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

*H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Doubling effect parameters (parameter type: DOUBLING)

For effect type 34 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Lch Delay Adjust the delay time of the L channel. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99 ms, 100--200 ms

3. Rch Delay Adjust the delay time of the R channel. Range: 0.1--9.9 ms, 10--99ms, 100--200 ms

4. Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

*L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

*H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Mixer Functions

Chorus effect parameters (parameter type: CHORUS)

For effect type 35 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Depth Adjust the chorus depth. Range: 0--99

3. Double Time Adjust the time difference of the doubling effect. Range: 0--99

4. Double Lvl Adjust the volume of the doubling effect. Range: 0--99

5. Filter Adjust the tone of the delay sound. Range: L9~L1, OFF, H1~H9

* L1~L9 = LPF (larger numbers will lower the cutoff frequency)

* H1~H9 = HPF (larger numbers will raise the cutoff frequency)

Flanger effect parameters (parameter type: FLANGE)

For effect type 36 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Rate Adjust the speed of modulation. Range: 0.01--2.00 Hz

3. Depth Adjust the depth of modulation. Range: 0--99

4. Mod Delay Adjust the modulation delay. Range: 0--200

5. Feedback Adjust the number of modulation repeats. Range: 0--99

Delay pitch effect parameters (parameter type: DELAY PITCH)

For effect type 38 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following five parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Pitct Adjust the amount of pitch shift. Range: -24--0--+24

*+/-12 is one octave. +/-24 is two octaves.

3. Adjust Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--+50

*+50 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat.

4. Delay Time Adjust the delay time until the pitch-shifted sound is heard. Range: 0--500 ms

5. Feedback Adjust the number of delay repeats. Range: 0--99

Mono pitch effect parameters (parameter type: MONO PITCH)

For effect type 37 of the preceding "Effect type" table, the following four parameters can be adjusted.

1. Eff Level Adjust the effect return level: 0~99

2. Pitch Adjust the amount of pitch shift. Range: -24--0--+24

*+/-12 is one octave. +/-24 is two octaves.

3. Adjust Make fine adjustments to the amount of pitch shift. Range: -50--0--+50

*+50 is a semitone sharp. -50 is a semitone flat.

4. Mode Select the processing method. Range: 1--3

Mixer Functions

Flashing

Scene memory

The VF80 provides 100 Scene memories (S00 to S99) for each program. You can store a set of desired parameter

settings to each memory. Items to be stored include all parameters set by mix parameter editing functions, as

well as all track fader levels. In addition to 100 Scene memories, the VF80 also provides 10 Temporary memories

(T00 to T09) that can be used with all programs in common. Note that all settings stored in Temporary memories

disappear when turning off the power.

You can give a desired title (name) with up to 16 alphanumeric or symbolic characters to each Scene/Temporary

memory. (Note that up to 11 characters can be shown on the display.)

Storing the current scene

You can store the current scene (settings) to a Scene

or Temporary memory by using the following proce-

dure.

<Hint>

Scene memories (shown as S00 through S99 on the list)

are retained even if the power is turned off, while Tem-

porary memories (shown as T00 through T09 on the list)

disappear when the power is turned off, though they do

not disappear when changing the program.

If you want to store a Temporary memory to a Scene

memory (S00 to S99), recall the temporary number be-

fore turning off the power and store the settings to the

desired Scene memory number.

Press the [SCENE] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the desired

scene number.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired scene number

to which you want to store the current settings, and

press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key. (In the following example, "S01" is

selected.)

The scene name of the program which you worked with

before entering the scene memory mode is duplicated

to the name of the selected scene number, whose

leftmost character flashes, showing that it can be ed-

ited.

Enter the desired scene name by using the [JOG] dial

for selecting a character and using the [CURSOR / ]

keys for moving the editing (flashing) point.

You can specify a scene name with up to 16 alphanu-

meric or symbolic characters and can see up to 14 char-

acters on the display. The following characters can be

entered:

A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, + - * / # & ! ? ( ) [ ] < > : . , etc.

After completing the scene name entry, press the

[TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display changes to the Normal display of the pro-

gram whose scene name has just been set.

Recalling a scene

You can recall the settings stored in Scene or Tempo-

rary memories.

• If the "

Fader recall On/Off setting

" menu described

later is set to "

OFF"

, when recalling a desired scene

memory, fader settings are not recalled, while "

Scene

Recalled Fader RCL OFF

" is momentarily shown on the

screen.

• If the "

Fader recall On/Off setting

" menu is set to "

regardless of the current physical positions of track

and master faders, the audio is output at the fader

positions when they were stored. We suggest you to

turn the monitor volume down when recalling a scene

memory to prevent an accidentally accessing high-

volume sound.

Press the [SCENE] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the scene

number.

Mixer Functions

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired scene number

to be recalled.

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The selected scene is recalled and the display changes

to the Normal display.

Deleting a scene

You can delete an unnecessary Scene or Temporary

memory by using the following procedure.

<Notes>

• You cannot delete the memory in scene number

If you select scene number

and try to delete the

memory, "

DELETE

" does not appear on the display.

• You cannot undo deleting a scene.

Be sure not to select a wrong scene number to be

deleted.

Press the [SCENE] key.

The display shows the scene number/title list.

Select a memory to be deleted using the [JOG] dial.

Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The message asking for confirmation to delete the scene

appears and "Sure?" flashes.

To cancel to delete the mark, press the [EXIT/NO] key

now.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The selected memory is deleted and the scene name

changes to "[Un-defined]", showing that no memory is

stored.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Fader adjust

After recalling a scene, the recalled fader level usu-

ally does not match the current physical fader posi-

tion, you can move the physical faders to match the

current fader positions of the scene.

The following description is assumed that "Fader re-

call setting" of the setup mode is set to "Trk & Mst."

Press the [SCENE/FADER] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the fader setting screen.

The fader icon changes according to the relation be-

tween the physical fader position and recalled fader

position, as show below.

•The current physical fader po-

sition matches the recalled po-

sition.

•The current physical fader po-

sition is higher than the recalled

position.

•The current physical fader po-

sition is lower than the recalled

position.

Move a physical fader manually to match the recalled

(scene memory) position.

After adjusting all the fader positions, press the [EXIT/

NO] key.

<Note>

If you recall a scene when "

Fader recall setting

" of the

setup mode is set to "

OFF

", the current physical fader

positions are valid.

Flashing

Mixer Functions

Scene title

Scene number Mark title

Scene sequence

Using the scene sequence function, you can recall desired scene memories at the desired mark positions during

playback. For example, you can recall scene memory 02 at "Bar 17/Beat 1" and scene memory 04 at "Bar 25/Beat

1", etc. To execute the scene sequence function, you must first assign scene (or temporary) memories to marks

in the mark map. If you set the timebase to Bar/Beat/Clk, you can assign scene memories to be recalled to the

musical positions (Bar/Beat/Clk numbers). Of course, you may set the timebase to ABS.

<Note>

You must store data to scene memories before assigning

to the mark map.

Assigning scene memories to the mark map

In the following description, we assume that the

timebase is set to Bar/Beat/Clk.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ/

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen shows the mark map, in which the current

marks are listed.

In the mark map example below, only scene memory 00

is assigned to mark 00. ("Non" means that no memory is

assigned to the corresponding mark.)

<Hint>

You can view mark titles instead of mark positions

(in bar/beat/clock base or ABS time base) in the mark

map. Pressing the [TIME BASE SEL] key while the mark

map screen is shown switches mark positions and

mark titles.

Select the desired mark using the [JOG] dial, and then

press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The display shows the screen for editing the selected

mark.

Highlight "Non" using the [CURSOR / ] keys, and

then select the desired scene number to be assigned

to the mark using the [JOG] dial.

When selecting a scene number which holds data, its

scene title is also shown below the scene number.

After selecting the scene number, press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

Repeat steps 1 through 4 to assign scene numbers to

other marks.

In the example below, several scene numbers are as-

signed to marks and you are ready for executing the

scene sequence function described later.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key after assigning all desired

scenes to marks.

Mixer Functions

Highlighted

Deleting a mark from the mark map

You can delete an unnecessary mark from the mark

map.

<Note>

You cannot delete

mark 00

While the VF80 is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ/

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen shows the mark map.

Highlight the desired mark using the [JOG] dial.

Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The message asking for confirmation to delete the mark

appears and "Sure?" flashes.

To cancel to delete the mark, press the [EXIT/NO] key

now.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The map is deleted and the following marks are renum-

bered.

Scene sequence on/off selection

You can turn on or off the scene sequence function

for selecting whether or not performing the scene

sequence function using the mark map.

While the VF80 is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ] key.

The [SCENE SEQ] key lights in green, showing that the

scene sequence function is active (ON).

Each time you press the [SCENE SEQ] key, ON and OFF

alternates.

When turning on the scene sequence function, "SCENE

SQ: ON" appears momentarily on the Normal screen and

then the scene number is highlighted.

When turning off the scene sequence function, "SCENE

SQ: OFF" appears momentarily on the Normal screen

and then the highlighted scene number returns to the

Normal screen.

Executing the scene sequence

If you start playback while the scene sequence func-

tion is active (ON), the scenes will be recalled accord-

ing to the mark map.

<Note>

When executing the scene sequence, the fader positions

may be recalled or not according to the fader recall mode

setting in the setup mode (the default is "

OFF

").

For example, if you set the fader recall mode to "

", both

the track and master faders are automatically recalled

every time the current scene changes.

On the contrary, if you set the fader recall mode to "

OFF

(the default mode), fader positions are not recalled so you

can manually control fader positions as you like.

We suggest you to make sure to set the fader recall mode

suitably for your work before executing the scene se-

quence. See "

Fader recall mode setting

" on page

133

for de-

tails.

The following show the screen appearances during play-

back with the mark map in which scene number 02 (with

the title "BBBB") is assigned to "Bar 12, Beat 1" and scene

number 06 (with the title "CCCC") is assigned to "Bar 20,

Beat 4."

The unit starts playback from "Bar -2, Beat 1" with

the settings stored in scene number 00 (Init Mix).

The unit recalls scene number 02 (BBBB) at "Bar

12, Beat 1" and continues playback.

The unit recalls scene number 06 (CCCC) at

"Bar 20, Beat 4" and continues playback.

<Note>

The effect preset may not be changed while the

scene sequence function is active!

Effect presets of the internal effect processor are clas-

sified into three types; ambience/delay type (No. 1

through 28), modulation/pitch type (No. 29 through

36), pitch type (No. 37 and 38) and distortion/simu-

lation type (No. 39 through 44).

Note that the scene sequence function does not re-

call an effect preset whose type is different from the

current one. This is to avoid momentary audio mut-

ing, and is not a malfunction. The other mix param-

eters of the scene can be recalled even if it includes

an effect preset whose type is different from the cur-

rent one.

Recorder Functions

The VF80 is "cueing" in the forward direction.

The VF80 is "cueing" in the backward direction.

The VF80 is "cueing" in the forward direction at 64x the normal speed.

Recorder Functions

This chapter describes various recorder functions.

Cueing

The cueing function allows you to monitor audio at higher or lower speed.

Cueing with the [F FWD]/[REWIND] keys

By pressing the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during play-

back, you can monitor (cue) the sound at 3 times the

normal speed.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

Press the [F FWD] or [REWIND] key during playback.

The VF80 starts "cueing" at 3 times the normal speed,

while "FWD" or "RWD" appears on the screen.

To return to the normal playback, press the [PLAY] key.

Shuttle cueing

During playback, "shuttle cueing" is possible at the

speed between 1 and 64 times the normal speed.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback.

Rotate the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

• Rotating the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial clockwise moves the

position to the forward direction, while rotating the dial

counter-clockwise moves the position to the backward

direction.

• According to the rotating degree, the cueing speed varies

among 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x, 32x, and 64x.

The current cueing speed is shown on the screen.

• As long as holding down the [SHIFT] key, shuttle cueing

continues even if you release the [JOG/SHUTTLE] dial.

The VF80 is "cueing" in the backward direction at 64x the normal speed.

The VF80 is still.

To return to the normal playback, press the [PLAY] key.

<Remember!>

Once the data is rewound to the beginning of a pro-

gram (ABS 0), playback starts from the beginning of

the program, regardless of pressing the [SHIFT] key.

When reaching the end of a program (ABS: 23H 59M

59S), the program stops and the [PLAY] hey flashes.

Recorder Functions

current scrubbing position

Digital scrubbing

Digital scrubbing can be done between 0x and 1x

speed without changing the pitch while the VF80 is

stopped.

You can scrub audio track by track. The level enve-

lope of the scrub track is shown on the screen, allow-

ing you to locate the beginning of a song or interval

of songs easily.

Furthermore, you can use the position located by

digital scrubbing as an edit point for the track editing

or auto-punch in/out.

Performing digital scrubbing

While stopped, press the [WAVE FORM SCRUB] key.

The VF80 enters the scrub mode, and the display shows

the screen below.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for the

track you are going to scrub.

The level envelope of audio recorded on the selected

track is shown. When the VF80 is stopped, "<STILL>" is

also shown.

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can scrub audio of the

selected track.

The vertical line in the center shows the current posi-

tion, and you can hear scrubbing audio from this posi-

tion to either the forward or backward direction.

When rotating the [JOG] dial clockwise, "Scrub >" is

shown. When rotating the [JOG] dial counter-clockwise,

"< Scrub" is shown.

The cursor (the vertical line) moves while scrubbing,

while the time value (or bar/beat) of the current posi-

tion is shown in realtime.

If you want to scrub another track, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Storing the digital scrub point

You can store the scrub point to the Start, End or To

point for track editing functions (such as Copy, Move,

Paste and Erase), or the auto-punch in point.

• To store the scrub point to the Start point:

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT]

key.

"Edit Start Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the

scrub point is stored to the Start point for track editing.

• To store the scrub point to the End point:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

"Edit End Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the scrub

point is stored to the End point for track editing.

• To store the scrub point to the To point:

Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

"Edit To Point Stored!" is shown briefly and then the scrub

point is stored to the To point, which can be used as the

starting point of Paste or the auto-punch In point.

• After storing the point, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen that was shown

when finishing scrubbing.

<Hint>

• You can also store the point by pressing the [ENTER/

YES] key after highlighting “START”, “END” or “TO” by

using the [CURSOR ] or [CURSOR ] key.

• By pressing the [| / MARK] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key, you can store the scrub point to a mark

memory.

Recorder Functions

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

123

Vari Pitch

You can alter the playback or recording speed of the recorder within +/- 6.0 % range in 0.1 % increments/dec-

rements by using the vari pitch function. With the vari pitch function, the pitch changes according to the speed.

Turning on or off the vari pitch function

Press the [VARI PITCH/EDIT] key.

The key lights up in green, showing the vari pitch func-

tion is active.

Press the [VARI PITCH/EDIT] key again.

The key turns off, showing the vari pitch function is not

active.

<Note>

You can turn on or off the vari pitch function while

stopped or during playback, however, you cannot turn

on or off the function during recording.

Setting the speed

You can adjust the speed while stopped or during

playback, however, you cannot adjust the speed dur-

ing recording. If you adjust the speed during play-

back with the vari pitch function active, you can moni-

tor the result of speed (pitch) change while adjusting.

While stopped or during playback, press the [VARI

PITCH/EDIT] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The current pitch value is highlighted, showing that the

value can be edited.

"ON" or "OFF" (of the vari pitch function) is also shown

on the screen.

Use the [JOG] dial to enter the pitch value.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to return to the Normal screen.

<Notes>

• Even if the pitch value is set to 0.0 % (no speed

change), pressing the

[VARI PITCH]

key turns on the

vari pitch function.

In such a condition, the function is active but the

speed is not changed.

• The vari pitch function automatically turns off by

carrying out any of the following.

1.Turning the power off and then on. (The pitch

value is also reset to 0.0 %.)

2.Setting the slave mode to "On" in the setup mode.

(The pitch value is retained.)

Note that you cannot turn on the vari pitch

function when the slave mode is "On".

3.Setting the digital input to "On" in the setup mode

("DIGI IN" is shown on the screen).

Note that you cannot turn on the vari pitch

function when the digital input is selected.

Recorder Functions

Current time (or musical position)

The Start point is set to the captured time (or musical

position), which is shown here.

The End point is set to the captured time (or musical po-

sition), which is shown here.

Current time (or musical position)

Loop Function

After locating the Start point, playback starts automatically.

When the playback position reaches the End point,

the recorder locates to the Start point automatically.

START point

Playback

END point

Using the loop function, you can repeat the desired part between the Start and End points.

By using the loop function together with the punch in/out or training mode, you can concentrate on playing

without the need for operating the VF80.

Setting the Start and End points

There are following three methods for setting the Start

and End points.

1. Capturing the current position "On-the-fly"

2. Editing the time (or musical position) via the screen

3. Setting by marks

Capturing the current position "on-the-fly"

While stopped or running, you can set the Start or End

point at the point you capture.

Press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the loop screen in which you can set

the Start and End points.

At the point where you want to set the Start point, press

the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

"Start Point Stored!" briefly appears and the Start point

is set to the captured point.

Current time (or musical position)

At the point where you want to set the End point, press

the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

"End Point Stored!" briefly appears and the End point is

set to the captured point.

<Note>

The Start point must be earlier than the End point.

Otherwise, the loop function cannot be performed.

Editing the position via the screen

In the following description, the recorder is assumed

to be stopped and the ABS time base is selected.

Press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the loop screen in which you can set

the Start and End points.

Recorder Functions

The "seconds" value flashes.

A mark is shown.

Flashing

To edit the Start point, press the [ENTER/YES] key while

"Start Point" value is highlighted.

The "seconds" value flashes, showing that it can be ed-

ited.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the flashing value,

and use the [JOG] dial to edit the value.

You can also use the [CURSOR / ] keys to edit the value.

After editing all values, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display returns to the similar screen shown in step

1 above, in which the Start point is set to the edited time.

To edit the End point, use the [CURSOR ] key to high-

light the "End point" value and carry out the same

operations as steps 2 through 4 above.

<Note>

As also noted in "

capturing the current position on-the-

fly

", the Start point must be earlier than the End point.

Otherwise, the loop function cannot be performed.

Setting the Start and End points by marks

You can set the Start and End points by marks.

<Note>

This method only can be used when any mark point is

already stored.

While stopped, press the [LOOP/EDIT] key while hold-

ing down the [SHIFT] key.

The display shows the loop screen in which you can set

the Start and End points.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

Both the Start point and End point value fields show a

mark (number and name).

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The mark shown on the Start point value field starts

flashing.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The Start point is set to the selected mark, while the

display returns to the similar screen shown in step 2

above.

To edit the End point, use the [CURSOR ] key to high-

light the "End point" value and carry out the same

operations as steps 3 through 4 above.

The selected mark is set to the End point.

<Hint>

When rehearsing the auto punch in/out, if you also

activate the loop function in which the Start point is

set to a point a little bit earlier than the In point while

the End point is set to a point a little bit later than the

Out point, you can rehearse the auto punch in/out

repeatedly as many times as you like.

The loop function is also useful when you make a prac-

tice using the training mode.

Carrying out the loop playback

Once setting the Start and End points, you can carry

out the loop function.

Press the [LOOP] key to illuminate the key.

The loop function is now active.

Each time you press the [LOOP] key, On and Off of the

loop function alternates.

Start playback from the point earlier than the Start point.

When the recorder reaches the End point, it automati-

cally locates to the Start point and starts playback from

that point. The recorder continues loop playback until

stopping the recorder.

To stop loop playback, press the [LOOP] key to turn off

the lamp and press the [STOP] key.

Recorder Functions

Program

The VF80 can have up to 99 programs (P01 through P99) and usually each program manages one song.

You can make recording against each program or playback materials recorded on each program.

This section describe program-related operations.

Creating a new program

When formatting a hard disk, a program (P01) is au-

tomatically created.

To create a new program, follow the procedure below

while the recorder is stopped and the display shows

the Normal screen.

<Note>

The initial settings for a new program are copied from the

setting of the current program.

Therefore, if you want to make a new program with the

same settings as an existing program, bring up the pro-

gram before creating a new program.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for selecting, renaming or deleting a pro-

gram appears. (The screen example below shows the

initial condition where only Program 01 exists.)

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight "P02 [New Program]"

and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

When highlighting "P02 [New Program]", only high-

lighted "SELECT" is shown at the bottom of the screen.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key creates a new program

(P02 in this example) with the tentative title whose

leftmost character ("#" in this example) is highlighted.

In this condition, you can enter the program title by

following the procedure described in "<How to enter a

desired title> below.

Note that you may use the program with the tentative

title ("#0002" in this example) if you do not need to en-

ter the desired one. Anyway, you may also enter/edit

the title later by the procedure described in "Editing a

program title" on page 62.

To use the program with the tentative title, press the

[EXIT/NO] key. To put the desired title, see the following.

• Rotate the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR / ] keys)

to select a character for the blinking point from

among those listed below.

• Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the blinking

point.

<Hint>

When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial

while holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among

characters surrounded with the box above.

This function will allow you to save time for select-

ing a desired character.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after entering the title.

The title is set.

Press the [EXIT/NO] (or [STOP]) key.

The setup mode exits and the display shows the Nor-

mal screen of the newly created program.

<Hint>

• When creating a new program, the next program

number to the highest program number in the

existing programs is assigned.

If there is only one program (P01), Program 02

(P02) will be created. If there is five programs (P01

through P05), Program 06 (P06) will be created.

• Creating a new program consumes a small amount

of the recordable disk space. Also note that when

the recordable disk space is not enough, you

cannot create a new program.

Recorder Functions

P01 P02 P03 P04 P05

P01 P02 P03 P04

P03 is deleted.

Selecting a program

When more than one program exists on the disk, you

have to select the desired program before starting

operations for recording, playback or editing.

Select the desired program by following the procedure

below while the recorder is stopped and the display

shows the Normal screen.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for selecting, renaming or deleting a program

appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers

and titles are shown.

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the desired program and

then press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

Deleting a program

You can delete an unnecessary program individually.

To make recording or editing, a certain amount of disk

space is needed. By deleting unnecessary programs,

the available disk space increases.

<Notes>

• When only one program (P01) exists, if you try to

delete the program, the data in the program is deleted

but P01 remains.

• For example, when five programs (P01 through P05)

exist, if you delete P03, it looks like P05 is deleted. This

is because the program numbers higher than 03 move

down. In other words, P04 and P05 become P03 and

P04 respectively.

Note that you cannot undo or redo deleting the program.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for selecting, renaming or deleting a program

appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers

and titles are shown.

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the program to be de-

leted and then press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while

holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The screen shows "Delete! Sure?", asking you confirm.

<Hint>

You may use the [CURSOR ] to highlight "DELETE" and

press the [ENTER/YES] key to bring up the screen

above, instead of pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The selected (highlighted) program is deleted, and the

following programs in the list move up.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to switch to the Normal screen.

The previous program of the deleted program is se-

lected.

Editing a program title

You can edit a program title anytime by following the

procedure below.

Note that you can also enter a program title in the

process of creating a new program as mentioned ear-

lier.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down

the [SHIFT] key.

The screen for selecting, renaming or deleting a program

appears. In the screen, all existing program numbers

and titles are shown.

Recorder Functions

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight (select) the desired pro-

gram and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while

holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Now you can edit the title of the selected program.

The leftmost character of the selected program is flash-

ing.

<Hint>

You may use the [CURSOR ] to highlight "RENAME"

and press the [ENTER/YES] key to bring up the screen

above, instead of pressing the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the flashing (ed-

iting) point and use the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR / ]

keys) to select a character for the flashing point.

You can put a title name with up to 16 characters from

among those listed below.

When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial while

holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among characters

surrounded with the box below.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after editing/entering the

title.

The edited/entered title is set.

Press the [EXIT/NO] (or [STOP]) key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Track editing

Because the VF80 uses a 3.5-inch E-IDE hard disk as the recording media, you can make non-linear and non-

destructive audio editing by track effectively.

Copy & Paste

The Copy & Paste function allows you to copy track

data of a desired part and paste it to a desired part of

the same or different track.

The copied data remains after pasting the data, so you

can paste the data as many times as required.

The copy & paste function is useful when using the

same musical part repeatedly in a song.

Move & Paste

The Move & Paste function allows you to move track

data of a desired part and paste it to a desired part of

the same or different track.

Unlike the copy & paste operation, the moved data

does not remain in the original position.

<Notes>

• Copy data (or Move data) is replaced with the new data every time the copy (or move) operation is carried out.

• Note that copy data changes if you paste the copy data to the original data.

• The copy & paste (or move & paste) editing is performed on the current program. Therefore, do not change the current

program until the editing operations are completed.

AA'

START Point END Point TO Point

Copy & paste within the same track.

Copy & paste between different track.

AA'

START Point END Point TO Point

Move & paste within the same track.

Move & paste between different track.

Flashing

Recorder Functions

or "MovePaste"

Performing Copy (or Move) & Paste

Set the Start and End points for the copy (or move)

operation and To point for the paste operation.

Using the digital scrub function, set the Start, End and

To points. See "Storing the digital scrub point" for details

about how to set the points.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [TRACK EDIT]

key.

The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Copy Paste" (or "Move

Paste") and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the source

track(s) and destination track(s).

Use the [JOG] dial to select the source track(s) from

which the data is copied (moved).

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among 1

through 8, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8, 1-6, and 1-8.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight (and flashes) the

right field, and use the [JOG] dial to select the destina-

tion track(s) to which the data is copied (moved).

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options as below

depending on the track(s) you selected in step 4.

Source track(s) Destination options

a mono track (1 through 8) 1 through 8

a pair of tracks 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, and 7&8

1-6 1-6 only

1-8 1-8 only

In the example below, data on tracks 3&4 is copied (or

moved) and pasted onto tracks 7&8.

The corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of

the source track(s) light in green, while the correspond-

ing [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of the destination

track(s) light in red.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting tracks.

The display shows the "Point Select" screen as below, in

which you can view the Start, End and To points set via

the digital scrub operation.

<Hints>

On the screen above, you can perform the following

operations.

1. Editing the Start, End and To points

2. Setting the Start and To points to "ABS 0" and the End point

to "REC END"

3. Checking the data to be copied (or moved)

4. Setting the Start, End and To points by marks

• To edit the Start, End and To points:

Highlight the time field of the desired (Start, End or To) point,

and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The "seconds" value starts flashing, showing that you can

edit it. Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the flashing

value, and use the [JOG] dial to enter a value.

After entering the desired time, pressing the [ENTER/YES]

key to store the time data to the point.

• To set the Start and To points to "ABS 0" and the End

point to "REC END":

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

"ALL OFF" changes to "ALL ON", and the Start and To

points are set to "ABS 0", while the End point is set to "REC

END" point. This function is useful when you copy (or

move) all track data (from "ABS 0" to "REC END") to dif-

ferent track(s).

• To check (monitor) the data to be copied (or moved)

[Source Play function]:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the "Source Play" screen as shown

below and the recorder starts playback of the data to be

copied (or moved).

You can hear audio by moving up the corresponding track

fader. After checking audio, press the [STOP] key.

The display returns to the screen shown before perform-

ing the Source play function.

Recorder Functions

• To set editing points by marks:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

Each data field for the Start, End and To points changes

to show the current option by mark as shown below.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight the field for the

desired point, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The field starts flashing.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The point is set to the selected mark.

<Note>

This operation can be performed only when any mark

is set. When no mark is set, "

00:ABS 0

" is the one and

only option for each point.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the field ("01"

above) for the number of times for repeat paste, and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

"01" starts flashing and you can now enter the number

of times for repeat paste.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired number and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

You can select any number between "01" and "99".

<Note>

Basically you can select the number of times for repeat

paste between 1 and 99, however, if the recordable space

of the hark disk is limited, you may not be able to select

the desired number. The VF80 automatically calculate

the available space and limit the number of times to the

appropriate value.

When setting the number of times for repeat paste to 02,

the copy & paste function is performed as below.

A''

AA'

START Point END Point TO Point

Copy & paste within the same track.

Copy & paste between different track.

Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The copy & paste (or move & paste) function is per-

formed. When finished, "Completed!" appears on the

screen.

<Hint>

You may use the [CURSOR >] to highlight "EXE" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key to perform the function, instead of

pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

<Note>

The copy & paste (or move & paste) operation cannot be

performed when there is not enough disk space to per-

form the undo and redo operations. If you try to perform

the paste operation when there is not enough disk space,

The display will show "

Over Time!

", as well as the short

time.

In such a case, shorten the copy (or move) data by the

amount more than the displayed time or delete unnec-

essary sections or programs to keep the enough space,

and then try to paste again.

Undo/redo of Copy & Paste

You can undo a copy & paste or move & paste opera-

tion, as well as redo it (undo the undo operation).

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after completing the

copy & paste (or move & paste) operation, you can

return the track(s) to the condition before performing

the copy & paste (or move & paste) operation.

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key just after

performing the undo operation, you can undo the undo

operation and return the track(s) to the condition

after performing the copy & paste (or move & paste)

operation.

Note the following for performing the undo/redo opera-

tion.

<Notes>

You can undo or redo only when the recorder is stopped.

If you carry out any of the following after performing the

copy & paste (or move & paste) operation, you cannot

undo/redo the copy & paste (or move & paste) opera-

tion.

1.Making a new recording

2.Performing a new editing

3.Letting the recorder run in playback (or recording)

mode and pass through the auto punch-in point while

the auto punch mode is active

4.Turning off the power of the VF80

5.Performing any of the program operations (select,

rename or delete).

Recorder Functions

Erasing track data

You can erase a desired part of track data. You can

select a track or tracks (of which you are going to erase

data) from among each individual track, each pair of

tracks, 1-6 and 1-8.

START Point END Point

ABS 0 REC END

Erase

• When all eight tracks (1 through 8) are recorded, if you

erase a part of the chosen track, only the erased part

becomes silent (no audio) and the following material

does not move advance to fill the gap.

Therefore, the REC END point remains the same.

However, if you erase a part between the chosen point

(=Start point) and the REC END point (=End point) of

all tracks, the REC END point moves advance.

• The erase operations are performed on the current

program. Therefore, do not change the current pro

gram until all the operations are completed.

Erasing

Set the Start and End points for the erase operation.

Using the digital scrub function, set the Start and End

points. See "Storing the digital scrub point" for details

about how to set the points.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [TRACK EDIT]

key.

The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Erase" and then press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the track(s)

to be erased.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the track(s) to be erased.

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among 1

through 8, 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8, 1-6, and 1-8.

The corresponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key(s)

of the selected track(s) light in red.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key after selecting the track(s).

The screen shows the Start and End points.

<Hint>

On the screen above, you can perform the following

operations.

1. Editing the Start and End points

2. Setting the Start point to "ABS 0" and the End point to "REC

END"

3. Checking the data to be erased

4. Setting the Start and End points by marks

• To edit the Start and End points:

Highlight the time field of a desired (Start or End) point, and

then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The "seconds" value starts flashing, showing that you can

edit it. Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the flashing

value, and use the [JOG] dial to enter a value.

After entering the desired time, pressing the [ENTER/YES]

key to store the time data to the point.

• To set the Start point to "ABS 0" and the End point to

"REC END":

Press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

"ALL OFF" changes to "ALL ON", and the Start point is set

to "ABS 0", while the End point is set to "REC END" point.

This function is useful when you erase all track data.

• To check (monitor) the data to be erased [Source Play

function]:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL/F2] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The display shows the "Source Play" screen as shown

below and the recorder starts playback of the data to be

erased.

You can hear audio by moving up the corresponding

track fader. After checking audio, press the [STOP] key.

The display returns to the screen shown before perform-

ing the Source play function.

Recorder Functions

• To set editing points by marks:

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key.

Each data field for the Start and End points changes to

show the current option by mark as shown below.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight the field for the

desired point, and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The field starts flashing.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired mark and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The editing point is set to the selected mark.

<Note>

This operation can be performed only when any mark

is set. When no mark is set, "

00:ABS 0

" is the one and

only option for each point.

Press the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

The erase function is performed. When finished, "Com-

pleted!" appears on the screen.

<Hint>

You may use the [CURSOR ] to highlight "EXE" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key to perform the function, instead of

pressing the [UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key.

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key after completing

the erase operation, you can return the track(s) to the

condition before performing the erase operation.

• By pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key just after

performing the undo operation, you can undo the

undo operation and return the track(s) to the

condition after performing the erase operation.

Note the following for performing the undo/redo op-

eration.

<Notes>

You can undo or redo only when the recorder is stopped.

If you carry out any of the following after performing

the erase operation, you cannot undo/redo the erase

operation.

1.Making a new recording

2.Performing a new editing

3.Letting the recorder run in playback (or recording)

mode and pass through the auto punch-in point while

the auto punch mode is active

4.Turning off the power of the VF80

5.Performing any of the program operations (select,

rename or delete).

Undo/redo of Erase

You can undo an erase operation, as well as redo it

(undo the undo operation).

Recorder Functions

<Example 1> Exchanging Track 8 and Track 24

<Example 2> Exchanging Tracks 1&2 and Tracks 7&8

<Example 3> Exchanging Tracks 1-8 and Tracks 17-24

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Track 12

Track 13

Track 14

Track 15

Track 16

Track 17

Track 18

Track 19

Track 20

Track 21

Track 22

Track 23

Track 24

Track Exchange

The track exchange function allows you to exchange

tracks (regardless of whether they are real or addi-

tional tracks) on the program in single track unit, 2-

track unit or 8-track unit.

By using this function, you can exchange tracks not

only among real tracks but also between real and

additional tracks, allowing to use tracks effectively.

For example, by exchanging a recorded real track with

an empty additional track, you can transfer data on

a real track to an additional track temporarily, so that

you can record a new material onto the real track.

The track exchange function is also used to check the

REC END point on an additional track.

Performing the track exchange

While the recorder is stopped, press the [TRACK EDIT]

key.

The screen for selecting the track edit type appears.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Exchange" and then press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the tracks to

be exchanged. The screen example below shows that

tracks 01 through 08 and tracks 17 through 24 are ex-

changed in 8-track unit.

The left field shows the source track(s), while the right

fields shows the destination track(s).

Use the [JOG] dial to select the source track(s).

Rotating the [JOG] dial changes the options among

single tracks (1 through 24), pair tracks (1&2 through

23&24), 1-8, 9-16 and 17-24.

Use the [CURSOR ] key to highlight (and flashes) the

right field, and use the [JOG] dial to select the destina-

tion track(s).

You can only select the same number of tracks as the

source track(s) selected in step 3 above.

For example, if you select a single track in step 3 above,

you can only select a single track here.

If the selected tracks for the left and right fields are re-

versed, the same track exchange is performed.

For example, "

1-8<->17-24

" and "

17-24<->1-8

" perform the

same track exchange.

The setting in which the same track(s) are selected for

both the left and right fields, such as "

1-8<->1-8

", is invalid.

If you press the

[ENTER/YES]

key with such a setting, the

display shows the message "

Select Err! Hit Any Keys

After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The track exchange function is performed and the dis-

play returns to the Normal screen.

One track exchange

8 track block exchange

2 track block exchange

Recorder Functions

Blinking

Editing Marks

This section describes how to edit marks, assuming that more than one mark is already stored in realtime

according to the operations described in "Basic Recording and Playback".

Viewing the mark list

You can view the marks stored.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The mark positions are shown by time or bar/beat/clock

values depending on the time base (In the following

screen example, the time base is set to "Bar/Beat/Clk").

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR / ] keys to scroll

the marks stored.

In the Mark map screen, you can not only view all the

marks but also perform various operations (such as

editing a mark position, entering a mark title, locating

a mark, deleting a mark and adding a mark) described

later.

<Hint>

When the Mark map screen is shown, you can switch

the screen to display the position (by time or bar/

beat/clock) or title of each mark by pressing the

[TIME BASE SEL] key.

After viewing the list, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Editing a mark position

You can edit the current position of a mark in the

mark map.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight

the desired mark, and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/

F2] key.

The display shows the screen for editing the chosen

mark.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight (and flashes)

the field you want to edit, and then use the [JOG] dial

to select the desired value.

When the time base is set to "ABS" or "MTC", you can

edit fields for minute, second, frame and subframe.

When the time base is set to "Bar/Beat/Clk", you can

edit fields for bar, beat and clock, as shown below.]

After editing time (or bar/beat/clock), press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

The edited value is stored to the mark and the display

returns to the Mark map screen.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Recorder Functions

Highlight (and flashes) this point.

Enter a mark title

You can enter or edit a title for each mark.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR / ] keys to high-

light the desired mark, and then press the [TIME BASE

SEL/F2] key.

The display shows the screen for editing the chosen

mark.

Flashing

Press the [CURSOR / ] keys repeatedly to highlight

(and flashes) the leftmost point of the title field.

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to move the highlighted

point among the title field, and use the [JOG] dial to

select the desired character.

You can use up to 14 characters for each title but be-

cause of the screen size, characters displayed at once

are limited. You can select a character from among the

following.

After entering/editing the title, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The entered/edited title is stored to the mark.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Hint

When selecting a character, rotating the [JOG] dial

while holding down the [SHIFT] key jumps among

characters surrounded with the box above.

Adding a mark

You can add a mark to the mark map.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR / ] keys to high-

light "New Mark", and then press the [TIME BASE SEL/

F2] key.

You can find "[New Mark]" at the bottom of the mark map.

Flashing

On the screen for editing the mark, "001" (Bar number

field) is flashing, showing that it can be edited.

The mark name is tentatively set to "Mark", while no

scene is assigned (indicated by "Non").

Use the [CURSOR / ] keys to highlight (and flashes)

the field you want to edit among BAR, BEAT and CLK,

and then use the [JOG] dial to select the desired value.

When setting the time base to ABS or MTC, you can set

the position in the similar way.

After setting the mark position, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The new mark is added to the mark map and the dis-

play returns to the Mark map screen.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

<Hint>

When adding a new mark, you can also enter a mark title

or assign a scene for the scene sequence function.

See "Enter a mark title" above and "Scene Memory" in "Mixer

Functions" for details about operations.

Recorder Functions

Flashing

Deleting a mark

You can delete an unnecessary mark.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR / ] keys to high-

light the mark you want to delete, and then press the

[UNDO/REDO/F3] key while holding down the [SHIFT]

key.

"Delete!" is shown and "Sure?" flashes.

To cancel the delete operation, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key.

The chosen mark is deleted and the mark map is sorted,

resulting marks following the deleted mark in the mark

map list move up.

For example, if you delete Mark 03, the current Mark

04, 05,... will replace Mark 03, 04,.... respectively.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the Normal screen.

Locating a mark

You can directly locate a mark.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SCENE SEQ./

MAP] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The Mark map screen appears.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR / ] keys to high-

light the mark you want to locate, and then press the

[SETUP/F1] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

The recorder locates to the selected mark, and the dis-

play returns to the Normal screen.

<Hint>

If you press the [SETUP/F1] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key after editing a mark position (see "Editing a

mark position"), you can locate the new mark position.

Advanced Operations

This chapter describes advanced or useful functions of the VF80.

Metronome function

The VF80 provides the internal tempo map, in which you can set the time signature (e.g. 4/4, 3/4) and tempo

(between 30 and 250).

It also can output the metronome sound (click) according to the tempo map, allowing you to record materials

at the specific tempo without the need of an external metronome or rhythm machine.

The metronome sound can be output from Track 6 of the VF80 when you set "Click?" in the Setup menu to "On."

<Note>

When Track 6 is set to output the metronome sound (i.e. when you set "

Click?

" menu in the Setup menu to "

"),

you cannot record audio on Track 6 or playback audio recorded on Track 6.

When you have finished using the metronome function, we recommend setting "Click?" menu in the Setup mode

to "

Off

" so that you can use Track 6 for recording and playback.

Setting the tempo map

To output the metronome sound (click), the tempo

map must be set.

To set the tempo map, use "Signature Set" and "Tempo

Set" menus in the Setup mode.

Initially, the time signature is set to "4/4" while the

tempo is set to "120."

To change the initial settings, operate the following.

While the VF80 is stopped, press the [SETUP] key to

enter the Setup mode.

The screen for selecting a menu in the Setup mode ap-

pears.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Signature Set" menu,

and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The screen for setting the time signature appears.

Set the desired time signature according to the proce-

dure described in "Setting the time signature" on page 122.

After setting the time signature, press the [EXIT/NO]

key to return to the screen for selecting a menu in the

Setup mode.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Tempo Set" menu, and

then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The screen for setting the tempo appears.

Set the desired tempo according to the procedure de-

scribed in "Setting the tempo" on page 124.

After setting the tempo, press the [EXIT/NO] key to

return to the screen for selecting a menu in the Setup

mode.

Go on to set the metronome output described below.

Setting the metronome output

You can set whether outputting the metronome sound

or not by "Click?" menu in the Setup mode.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the "Click?" menu, and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The initial setting is "Off."

Use the [JOG] dial to select "On", and then press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

Now the metronome sound will be output from Track

Press the [EXIT/NO] key repeatedly until exiting the

Setup mode.

Setting the time base to bar/beat

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key to set the time base to

"Bar/Beat."

When the time base is set to "Bar/Beat", you can moni-

tor the current position by Bar/Beat according to the

tempo map you set.

Monitoring the metronome sound

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback of the VF80.

The level meter for Track 6 shows the metronome sound

level.

Set the Master and Track 6 faders to the "0" position,

and raise the [PHONES] knob to monitor the metronome

sound via the headphones.

You can now record a material while listening to the

metronome sound as a guide.

Advanced Operations

Track bounce (Ping-pong recording)

When the number of empty tracks is short in the recording process, you can solve the problem by transferring

audio on the multiple already-recorded tracks to a different track or tracks.

This operation is called "Track bounce" or "Ping-pong recording". With the VF80, you can do this operation simply

by using the [BOUNCE] key.

When the Bounce mode is active, Tracks 7/8 are automatically armed and the materials recorded on Tracks 1

through 6 are ready to be bounced to Tracks 7/8.

In the following description for track bouncing operation, we assume that mono materials are recorded on Tracks

1 through 4, while a stereo material is recorded on Tracks 5 and 6.

On/off of bounce mode

Press the [BOUNCE] key.

Each press of the key alternates "On" and "Off."

When set to "On", the key is illuminated, while the

Bounce screen appears where "Remain" is displayed.

Tracks 7/8 are automatically armed and the corre-

sponding [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key flashes in red.

When the Bounce mode is active, you cannot arm the

other tracks (1 through 6).

Setting pan positions

Press the [PAN] key to set the pan position for each

track.

Set the pan positions at the desired points for Tracks 1

through 4, fully left for Track 5 and fully right for Track

6. See "Mixer Functions" for details about the pan set-

ting.

After setting all pan positions, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The balance mode screen appears.

Setting level of each track

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.

Press the [RECORD] key only.

The [RECORD] key starts flashing, while Tracks 7/8 enter

the input monitor mode.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback and adjust play-

back levels of Tracks 1 through 6 using the track fad-

ers.

Be careful not to light up the peak indicator when ad-

justing the playback level of each track.

<Note>

If the peak indicator lights up, the recorded sound

will be distorted. Adjust the playback level of each

track appropriately.

You can see the playback levels on Tracks 1 through 6,

input levels on Track 7/8 and output levels of the Ste-

reo busses (L and R) via the meters on the screen.

By raising the [PHONES] knob, you can monitor the

sound.

After adjusting the levels, stop the recorder and then

locate the beginning position of track bouncing.

Performing the track bounce

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key to start track bouncing.

The recorder starts recording of mixed audio from

Tracks 1 through 6 to Tracks 7/8.

After finishing the track bounce, press the [STOP] key

to stop the recorder.

Now you can use Tracks 1 through 6 to record new

materials.

<Notes>

• You can also apply EQ and/or effects to audio signals

on Tracks 1 through 6 to be bounce to Track 7/8.

See "

Mixer Function

" for details about how to apply EQ

and effects.

• When the Bounce mode is active, you can use any of

effect types

L01

through

L38

. Note that, if you enter

the Bounce mode when any of insert effect types is

selected, “

L01: Norm HALL

” will be automatically

selected.

Advanced Operations

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

Training mode

The VF80 provides the training mode which allows you to practice your instrument while playing back only Tracks

7/8. In the training mode, you can slow down the playback speed or altering the pitch, making it easy to play

along with your favorite musicians or transcribing ad-lib phrases.

You can also cancel the vocal or lead guitar solo which is positioned in the center, allowing you to replace it with

your vocal or guitar (like a karaoke).

The following description shows how to play the guitar along with audio recorded on Tracks 7/8.

<Hint>

Because only Tracks 7/8 can be played back in the Train-

ing mode, you have to record a song used for your prac-

tice in advance.

If you are going to use a song recorded on other tracks,

it will be a good idea to use the track exchange function

to move the song to Tracks 7/8.

Also, when you want to use an external source on CD,

MD, etc., record it onto Tracks 7/8 digitally using the

technique described later in "Digital Recording."

When copying a copyright material from CD, MD, etc.,

do not use the copy for any purpose except your prac-

tice or enjoyment. Any unauthorized use of the copy

for commercial purpose will constitute infringement

of such copyright and will render the infringer liable

to an action at law.

<Note>

When the training mode is active, you cannot make any

recording, as well as playback

Tracks 1 through 6

Connecting the instrument and headphones

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "∞" position.

Connect the instrument and headphones as shown in

the illustration above.

You may connect the instrument either [INPUT A] or

[INPUT B].

On/Off of training mode

Press the [TRAINING] key.

Each press of the key alternates "On" and "Off."

When set to "On", the [TRAINING] key is illuminated,

while the display shows the training mode screen.

On the training mode screen, you can set the follow-

ing. You can use the [CURSOR / ] key to select (high-

light) the item to be set.

1. Playback speed

2. Playback pitch

3. On/Off of the center cancel function

4. Setting of the cancel position

5. Low boost setting (for emphasizing the bass

sound)

<Note>

You can set the playback speed only while the VF80

is stopped. The other items can be set both while

stopped and during playback.

Advanced Operations

Slowing down the playback speed

You can change the playback speed only while the

recorder is stopped.

When "Norm" in the "Play Speed" field is highlighted,

use the [JOG] dial to select "Half."

The playback speed is set to half the normal speed and

the pitch automatically raises one octave.

To change only the pitch, see the next section.

To return to the normal speed, use the [JOG] dial to

select "Norm."

The playback speed returns to the normal speed.

Changing the pitch

The following items can be set both while stopped and

during playback.

Using the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the "Play Pitch"

field, and then use the [JOG] dial to select the desired

pitch.

You can set the pitch within the range of +/- one octave.

Canceling the center-positioned sound

Using the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the "Vo. Can-

cel" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to select "ON".

You can cancel the center-positioned sound such as a

lead vocal.

Depending on audio sources, you may not perfectly

cancel the sound you want to remove because it is not

exactly center-positioned. In such a case, perform the

next operation.

Setting the cancel position

Using the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the "Cancel

Pos" field, and then use the [JOG] dial to set the de-

sired value.

You can select the cancel position from "-99" via "0" to

"+99" in one step increments.

Try to find the best position where the sound to be

cancel gets lowest.

Boosting the bass sound

Using the [CURSOR ] key to highlight the "Lo Boost"

field, and then use the [JOG] dial to set the desired

value.

You can select the low boost level from "0" to "10" in one

step increments.

Playing along with the playback sound

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.

Press the [PLAY] key to starts playback of the VF80 and

raise the Track 7/8 fader gradually.

You can see the level is going up via the stereo output

level meters (L and R) on the screen.

Rotate the [PHONES] knob to adjust the headphones

level.

Play the guitar along with the playback sound of Tracks

7/8, while adjusting the [TRIM] knob to the appropri-

ate position where the [PEAK] indicator for the input

you connect the guitar does not light.

You can hear both the playback sound of Tracks 7/8

and your guitar together from the headphones.

If you move down the Tracks 7/8 fader, you can only

hear your guitar.

Advanced Operations

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

STEREO OUT L, R

S/P DIF OUTPUT

Digital master recorder

Analog master recorder

Mastering library

Ambience

Compressor

High Gain

Mid Gain

Low Gain

Rev Level

Rev Time

Pre Delay

Threshold

Ratio

Gain

Atack

Copy Protect

Mastering mode

You can use Tracks 7/8 as the mastering tracks.

After performing the track bouncing to mix down track signals to Tracks 7/8, you can record the audio signals

on Tracks 7/8 to an external (analog or digital) master recorder with applying EQ, reverb and compressor for

mastering (see the illustration below).

You can perform the above operation in the mastering mode, which can be selected by the [MASTERING] key.

When the mastering mode is active, only Tracks 7/8 can be played back, while the dedicated sound processing

for mastering is available. In the following description, we assume that the stereo mix signals are recorded on

Tracks 7/8.

Selecting a program to be played back

If there is more than one program in the VF80, select

the desired program to be played back.

See "Selecting a program" for the operation.

On/off of mastering mode

Press the [MASTERING] key.

Each press of the [MASTERING] key alternates ON and

OFF of the mastering mode.

When setting to ON, the [MASTERING] key is illuminated

and the following screen is displayed, while the [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Track 7/8 and the [STATUS/

SEL] key for the master are illuminated in green.

The screen example above shows the upper part of the

mastering setting. Pressing the [CURSOR ] key scrolls

down the setting items. To scroll up, press the [CUR-

SOR ] key.

The table below shows the mastering setting items.

You can select a desired preset entry

from 10 entries stored in the effect library.

See "Mastering library details" on the

next page.

Adjusts the EQ gain for the high fre-

quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.

Freq. and Q: fixed

Adjusts the EQ gain for the middle fre-

quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.

Freq. and Q: fixed

Adjusts the EQ gain for the low fre-

quency range within a +/- 18 dB range.

Freq. and Q: fixed

Adjusts the amount of reverb sound be-

tween 0 and 99.

Fixed (See “Mastering library details” on

the next page.

Fixed (See “Mastering library details” on

the next page.

Adjusts the threshold of the compres-

sor between -50 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB

steps.

Selects the compressor ratio from the

following options.

∞:1, 20:1, 10:1, 8:1, 6:1, 5:1, 4:1, 3.5:1,

3:1, 2.5:1, 2:1, 1,7:1, 1.5:1, 1.3:1, 1.1:1,

1:1

Adjusts the compressor gain between

0 dB and +18 dB.

Selects ON or OFF of the copy protec-

tion for the S/P DIF output signal.

When set to ON, the flag for limiting a

digital copy to one generation is set in

the S/P DIF digital output signal.

Advanced Operations

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

400Hz

1kHz

L-S

L0: FLAT

EQ Hi

4kHz H-S

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 0 (Rev Level)

+10

4 : 1

-25

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 8ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

+4.0

400Hz

1kHz

L-S

1.0

L1: Wet Mix

EQ Hi

8kHz H-S

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 75 (Rev Level)

+10

3 : 1

-30

Rev Time=0.5s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

<Hint>

When selecting a desired preset entry from the Master-

ing library, the initial parameter values of the entry are

shown on the screen.

See "Mastering library details" on the next page for the

detailed information.

Setting the mastering parameters

Set the [MASTER] fader at the "0" position.

Start playback and move up the Track 7/8 fader gradu-

ally.

You can monitor the playback sound of Tracks 7/8 by

rotating the [PHONES] knob clockwise.

In the mastering mode, you cannot monitor the play-

back sound of other tracks even if you move up the

faders.

Use the [CURSOR / ] key to highlight the parameter

value to be edited, and use the [JOG] dial to select the

desired value.

You can monitor the tailored sound of Tracks 7/8 in

realtime.

<Hint>

When any parameter value is changed from the

initial setting, "E" appears on the right of the preset

entry name (as shown below), showing that the cur-

rent setting is different from the initial setting.

On/off of the mastering processing

To switch on or off the mastering processing, use the

[CURSOR /] key to highlight the ON/OFF icon as

shown below, and use the [JOG] dial to select "ON" or

"OFF".

When "ON" is selected, the tailored sound is output.

When "OFF" is selected, the original sound is output.

Recording onto the master recorder

Stand by the master recorder for recording, and start

playback of the VF80.

You have to adjust the recording level now.

When the recording signal is digitally transferred from

the VF80 to the recorder, because a digital recorder usu-

ally does not provide the function for controlling the

digital input level, you must adjust the recording level

by controlling the stereo output level of the VF80 us-

ing the [MASTER] fader.

After setting the recording level, return the VF80 to the

beginning of the program.

Start recording of the master recorder and then start

playback of the VF80.

The stereo output (L and R) signals are recorded onto

the master recorder.

After finishing recording, stop the both machines.

<Hint>

When you record VF80 audio onto a digital master

recorder via the S/P DIF digital signal, if the copy

protection ("Cp Protect") is set to "ON", you can limit

the digital copy from the master to another recorder.

If you do not want to make digital copies freely from

the master, set the copy protection to "ON."

Mastering library details

The mastering library provides 10 preset entries

which can only be used in the mastering mode.

When applying mastering processing to the sound,

you can use a desired preset as a starting point of your

setting.

The following table shows the initial settings of EQ,

reverb and compressor parameters, as well as the

major usage for each preset.

Basic mastering set-

tings.

Can be used for a wide

range of music genre.

Makes a dry sound

wet.

Advanced Operations

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

+4.0

400Hz

1kHz

L-S

1.0

L2: Light Mix

EQ Hi

8kHz H-S

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 0 (Rev Level)

+18

3 : 1

-42

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 10ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

-18

400Hz

1kHz

L-S

1.0

L3: Live Mix

EQ Hi

8kHz H-S

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 99 (Rev Level)

1.5 : 1

-20

Rev Time=0.1s / Pre Dly=30ms : fixed

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

-3

400Hz

500Hz

L-S

2.0

L4: Pop Mix

EQ Hi

-3

4kHz H-S

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 80 (Rev Level)

+18

3.5 : 1

-36

Rev Time=0.7s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 10ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

+10

+15

400Hz

550Hz

L-S

3.5

L5: Dance

EQ Hi

-18

10kHz 3.5

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 0 (Rev Level)

+14

5 : 1

-30

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

-18

LPF-ON

400Hz

2kHz

L-S

L9: LO_Fi

EQ Hi

+15

2kHz LPF

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 0 (Rev Level)

∞ : 1

-25

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

-8

400Hz

500Hz

L-S

L8: Hall

EQ Hi

-4

6kHz H-S

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 80 (Rev Level)

1.5 : 1

-25

Rev Time=3.0s / Pre Dly=100ms : fixed

Atack Time = 8ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

400Hz

1kHz

L-S

L6: Hard

EQ Hi

4kHz H-S

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 0 (Rev Level)

+18

8 : 1

-36

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Gain Freq. (fixed) Q (fixed)

EQ Lo

EQ Mid

-6

LPF-ON

400Hz

1kHz

L-S

L7: 70s

EQ Hi

6kHz LPF

Comp THSHD

Comp Ratio

Comp Gain

Ambience 0 (Rev Level)

5 : 1

-10

Rev Time=1.0s / Pre Dly=0ms : fixed

Atack Time = 5ms : fixed

Makes a sound like

recorded in a small

live house.

Suitable for typical

pop music with vocal.

Suitable for a dancing

floor. A speedy sound

which makes an audi-

ence excite.

Powerful sound.

Soulful and energetic

sound of 70s'.

Makes a sound like

recorded in a concert

hall.

Narrow range sound

by limiting the fre-

quency range drasti-

cally.

Makes a dark sound

bright.

Advanced Operations

The internal mastering function is an expansion of the mastering function described earlier.

It allows you to record a mixed-down material on tracks 7 and 8 to the current drive on the VF80

while applying a mastering effect.

Therefore, unlike the mastering function, this function allows you to make high-quality mastering

inside the VF80, without the need of an external master recorder.

In addition, by installing the optional CD-RW drive (Model CD-1A), you can create original audio

CDs from the materials mixed down internally using the internal mastering function. See "Making an

Audio CD" on page 115 in "Save/load of song data" for details.

Internal Mastering Function

After executing internal mastering, a new program which saves a mastering material is automatically

created on the current drive, whose program number is set to one greater than the current greatest

program number.

For example, if there are 8 programs (P01 through 08) on the current drive, after mastering a desired

program data using the internal mastering function, a new program (P09) is automatically created and

the mastering signals produced by the mastering function are recorded on tracks 1 and 2 of P09.

Note that if the VF80 is under either of the following conditions, you cannot carry out internal mastering.

The internal mastering function allows you

to carry out all operations using the VF80

only.

1. There are 99 programs already existed on the current drive even though there is enough

recording space.

If you try to carry out internal mastering, "Can't New PGM!" is shown and the operation is ignored.

To carry out internal mastering, delete an unnecessary program.

2. There is not enough remaining space even though there are less than 99 programs on the current

drive.

If you try to carry out internal mastering, "Over Time!" is shown and the operation is ignored.

To carry out internal mastering, erase unnecessary song data or delete an unnecessary program.

See "Deleting a program" on page 62 and "Erasing track data" on page 66 in this manual.

<Figure-1>

<Figure-2>

Mastering Effect

Tracks 7 & 8

Analog Master Recorder

Digital Master Recorder

VF80

ST OUT

S/P DIF OUT LR

Mastering Effect

Tracks 7 & 8

VF80

New Program

Tracks 1 & 2

Advanced Operations

Select the desired program for mastering.

To select the desired program, while stopped, press

the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key, and select the program using the [JOG]

dial, then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Set the [MASTER] fader to the "0" position.

Press the [MASTERING] key.

The VF80 enters the mastering mode and the display

shows the mastering screen in which you can adjust

the mastering effects.

The [MASTERING] key lights up in red, while the [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys of tracks 7/8 and the master

channel light up in green.

Before performing the internal mastering, you can rehearse it as many times as you like, while

adjusting the track 7/8 level and sound effects.

In the following description, we assumes that a bounced material is recorded on tracks 7/8 of the

playback program. Headphones for monitoring are connected to the [PHONES] jack.

Rehearsing internal mastering

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the

beginning of the selected program.

The VF80 starts playback, while the display keeps

showing the screen for adjusting the mastering effects.

Tracks 1 and 2 are internally set to "input monitor",

allowing you to check over-level via the peak LED

indicators.

You can monitor the mastering sound through

headphones by raising the track 7/8 fader and/or

[PHONES] level control. The mastering levels are

shown on the level meters at the right on the screen.

During playback, adjust track 7/8 levels using

the 7/8 fader, as well as EQ and effect settings if

necessary.

Set the levels properly so that the PEAK LED indica-

tors do not flash or light frequently.

Note that levels may increase by changing EQ or

compressor parameters. When controlling the sound

characters and level, you should not only monitor the

level meters and listen to the sound, but also monitor

the PEAK LED indicators.

To adjusting the mastering effect parameters on the

mastering screen, use the [CURSOR] ( / ) keys to

select a parameter and the [JOG] dial to change the

parameter value.

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

[TRACK EDIT]

[MASTERING]

[ENTER/YES]

[JOG]

[SHIFT]

[PLAY]

[7/8 FADER]

[MASTER FADER]

[PHONES]

[STOP]

[STOP] + [REWIND]

Advanced Operations

Performing internal mastering

<Hint>

On the mastering screen, you can tailor the sound

by adjusting EQ settings (HI, MID and LOW), as well

as the ambiance and compressor.

See page 76 for details about the mastering effects.

<Note>

In the internal mastering function, the

"CpProtect"

(Copy Protect) setting, which is one of the master-

ing effect items, does not affect the internally record

material. The copy protect setting affects materials

recorded on a CD-RW/CD-R disc, described later.

See "

Making an audio CD

" on page

115

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the

[STOP] key to locate the beginning of the pro-

gram.

The VF80 locates the beginning of the program im-

mediately and "00m 00s" is shown at the top right of

the screen. Keep showing the same mastering screen

after stopping the VF80 and locating the beginning of

the program.

To repeat the rehearsal, perform steps 4 and 5 re-

peatedly after making the VF80 locate the beginning

of the program. After completing the rehearsal satis-

factorily, make sure to locate the beginning of the

program.

<Note: There is no need for selecting recording tracks.>

In the internal mastering function, unlike the normal

recording, you do not have to select recording tracks.

When recording a take in the internal mastering func-

tion according to the following procedure, the VF80 au-

tomatically arms Tracks 1 and 2.

Therefore, the

[TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

keys for tracks

1 and 2 never light up in red during recording.

Please read the following notes carefully before performing internal mastering.

<Note: You cannot undo an internal mastering take.>

You cannot undo an internal mastering take.

If you are not satisfied with the result, try again from

the beginning.

If you do not need a previously recorded program, de-

lete the program according to the procedure described

"Deleting a Program"

of the owner's manual.

<Note>

Internal mastering cannot be performed if rec-protected.

If the

"Rec Protected"

setting of the setup mode is set to

"ON"

, you cannot perform internal mastering.

If you try to perform it, a warning message (

"Protected!"

)

appears on the display. If this message appears, set the

"Rec Protected"

setting to

"OFF"

before performing in-

ternal mastering.

See page

129

in the owner's manual for details about

the setup mode.

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key. (You cannot perform the auto

punch- in function.)

When mastering starts, a new program is automati-

cally created and the material is recorded onto track

1 and 2 of the program. The ABS time at which mas-

tering starts is registered with the "Start point" of the

new program.

When completing mastering, press the [STOP]

key to stop.

"Please wait" appears on the display for a few seconds,

and the internal mastering mode quits, while the VF80

locates the beginning (ABS 0) of the newly created

program. The ABS time at which you press the [STOP]

key is registered with the "End point" of the new pro-

gram.

The following screen example shows that a title named

"Song Data-1" is mastered onto a new program named

"P09". As shown in the example below, "Mst<-" is pre-

fixed to a mastered program title, so that you can dis-

tinguish mastered programs from other programs.

The screen can show up to the first 12 characters of a

title name.

Playback the newly created program (P09, in the

example above) to check the result.

You can adjust the playback levels of mastered tracks

using track faders 1 and 2.

Read the following "Hint" carefully before making an

original audio CD from mastered materials.

<Note: The vari-pitch setting is not effective.>

When recording a take in the internal mastering func-

tion, the vari-pitch setting is not effective and the take

is always recorded at the normal speed.

A title example recorded using the internal mastering mode.

<Note>

After completing the rehearsal, be careful not to move

the track 7/8 and master faders and change the mas-

tering effect parameters.

If you wish to do another job after the rehearsal, you

should save the settings (fader positions and param-

eter settings) to a scene memory. See page

in the

owner's manual for details about the “

scene memory

”

function.

After completing all the adjustments, press the

[STOP] key to stop the VF80.

Advanced Operations

As described earlier, the starting and ending times of internal mastering are automatically

registered as "Start point" and "End point" respectively, which can be used for track editing

(copy, move and erase) for the newly created program (see the illustrations below).

This function is very convenient for making an audio CD from mastered materials, because

data between "Start point" and "End point" is automatically transferred to a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

Note that you cannot make an audio CD using the VF80 save function (described later) without

setting these two points.

The "Start point" and "End point" which have been automatically set can be checked after com-

pleting mastering by the following procedure.

Press the [TRACK EDIT/PGM] key while the

VF80 is stopped.

The display shows the screen for track editing, where

"Copy Paste" flashes.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting an origi-

nal and destination tracks for copy/paste.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

The display shows the screen for selecting edit

points, in which you can check "Start" and "End"

points that hold the beginning and end points of

the recording respectively (pointed by arrows be-

low).

After checking the "Start" and "End" points,

press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit the track edit

mode.

The display returns to the previous screen before

performing step 1.

See page 115 about how to make an audio CD from

mastered materials.

<Hint>

When recording more than one song continuously

to a CD-RW/CD-R disc, the VF80 automatically

record an approximately 2-second silence after each

END point.

<Note>

You can edit the

"Start point"

and

"End point"

be-

fore creating an audio CD, allowing adjustment

of intervals between songs.

We recommend to set the

"Start point"

and "

End

point"

of the new program created by the internal

mastering to desired times before creating an

audio CD.

Silence (about 2 seconds)

Start point End point

123

Start point End point

Internal mastering

Start point

(automatically registered) End point

(automatically registered)

Start point of internal mastering End point of internal mastering

New program (Tracks 1 & 2)

Original program (Tracks 7 & 8)

Data transferred to a CD-RW/CD-R disc

Flashing

Advanced Operations

Unlike the loop effect described earlier in "Mixer Functions", the insert effect is applied when

rerecording any recorded track among tracks 1 through 6.

This rerecording mode in which the insert effect is applied is called "REC EFFECT" mode.

Six distortion/simulation type effects are available for the insert effect. You can distort a guitar,

bass, drums or vocal, as well as simulate a famous guitar amplifier or microphone character.

Using the insert effect

Track 1

ASP

Effect

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

ASP

Effect

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

ASP

Effect Master Recorder

There are six effect types below available for the insert effect, in addition to 38 types for the loop effect as

described earlier in "Mixer Functions".

See page xx for details about parameters for each effect type.

“L39: Gtr Dist (guitar distortion)”

“L40: Bass Dist (bass distortion)”

“L41: Drum Dist (drum distortion)”

“L42: Voice Dist (voice distortion)”

“L43: Gtr Amp Sim (guitar amp simulator)”

“L44: Mic Sim (microphone simulator)”

Advanced Operations

The following explains how to record a guitar solo to track 1 and rerecord it while applying the

guitar distortion. Before executing recording, you can check the guitar sound with the distortion

effect while rehearsing the effect parameter settings until you satisfy with the sound.

We assume that the guitar is connected to the [INPUT A] connector and the VF80 locates to the

beginning of the program (ABS 0).

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2 3 4 5 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

You can check the guitar sound with an effect be-

fore recording.

"L39:Gtr Dist" should be selected for the guitar dis-

tortion.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for

track 1 to arm track 1.

Only the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1

flashes, while the [CH ON/OFF] key lights.

Raise the track 1 fader and [MASTER] fader to

the "0" position.

If these faders are not raised, you cannot monitor the

sound.

Press the [RECORD] key.

Track 1 is switched to "Input monitor".

Adjust the gain appropriately using the [TRIM]

control for [INPUT A] while playing the guitar.

You can monitor the guitar sound by raising the

[PHONES] control.

Press the [EFFECT] key repeatedly until the ef-

fect type selection screen appears.

When you press the [EFFECT] key for the first time

after turning on the power, "L01:Norm HALL" is shown

as the effect type.

Rehearsal

Use the [JOG] dial to select "L39: Gtr Dist" and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

"Insert Effect Selected!" is momentarily shown on the

display, followed by the parameter setting screen for

"L39: Gtr Dist".

Meanwhile, the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys for

tracks 1 through 6 starts flashing, showing that you

can select a track to which the effect is inserted.

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for

track 1.

Only the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1

flashes, showing that track 1 is selected.

Adjust parameters while playing the guitar to get

the desired sound.

You can select a desired parameter using the [CUR-

SOR] / keys and change the value using the [JOG]

dial.

Before editing parameters, you can monitor the sound

with the default parameter settings.

The monitor sound changes in realtime when chang-

ing a parameter.

See the next page for details about the parameters for

"L39: Gtr Dist".

<Caution!>

Do not raise the headphones volume too loud while

monitoring the sound, which may damage your ears.

Advanced Operations

The "L39: Gtr Dist" effect type has 11 parameters as

shown below. (Note that the screen example below

shows all parameters for the explanation. Actually,

you can see 5 parameters at a time while the other

parameters are hidden.)

Use the [CURSOR] / keys to select a highlighted

parameter. Use the [JOG] dial to select the value of

the highlighted parameter.

The monitor sound changes in realtime when chang-

ing a parameter.

1. Dist Type

Selects a distortion type.

Options: Acous, Rythm, OvDrv, Dist, Blues,

Fuzz, Lead, Metal (Default: Dist)

2. Dist Gain

3. Warm

Adjusts the distortion gain.

Range: 1 to 15 (The default depends on

the distortion type selected.)

4. Bass

Makes the sound warmer when On.

Options: ON, OFF (default: ON)

5. Middle

Adjusts the low frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

6. Treble

Adjusts the mid frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

7. Noise Gate

Adjusts the high frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

8. Out Level

Turns on or off the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 1 to 99 (default: OFF)

9. Delay Time

Sets the output level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

10. Feedback

Sets the delay time.

Range: 5 ms to 1200 ms (default: 250 ms)

11. Delay Level

Sets the feedback level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 40)

Sets the delay level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 0)

It will be a good idea to store a favorite pa-

rameter setting to a scene.

You can recall a stored setting whenever you

like. See page 52 for details about the scene

memory.

After making desired effect parameter settings in

rehearsal, record the guitar while monitoring the

effected sound.

Note that the dry sound is recorded though you

monitor the wet sound.

We assume that track 1 is "Input monitor" (i.e. the

[RECORD] key and the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL]

key for track 1 are flashing).

Recording the guitar

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to switch to the Normal

screen.

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key to start recording and play the

guitar.

The dry sound is recorded to track 1 while the wet

sound is monitored.

The screen shows both the recording level of the gui-

tar and the monitor level.

Press the [STOP] key to stop recording.

The [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1 still

flashes, while the [RECORD] key turns off.

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the

[STOP] key to locate to the beginning of the pro-

gram.

To check the recorded "

dry

" sound just re-

corded, press the

[EFFECT]

key while holding

down the

[SHIFT]

key to turn off the effect,

then press

[PLAY]

key to start playback.

If you do not turn off the effect, the "

wet

playback sound is monitored with the effect

you set in rehearsal.

Advanced Operations

The final step is to rerecord the recorded "dry" sound

on track 1 while applying the effect (guitar distor-

tion) with the setting you made in rehearsal.

Rerecording with effect

Press the [BOUNCE/REC EFF] key while hold-

ing down the [SHIFT] key.

The unit enter the REC EFFECT mode, in which you

can apply the insert effect. The screen shows some-

thing like below.

The [BOUNCE/REC EFF] key and the [TRACK STATUS/

TRACK SEL] key for track 1 flash.

Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the

beginning of the program.

You can confirm that the "dry" sound on track 1 is

replaced with the "wet" sound.

<Note>

Before playing back the rerecorded sound, always

turn off the effect by the above operation.

If you playback the rerecorded sound while the ef-

fect is set to

, you will monitor the "

wet

" sound

with applying the effect.

If you are not satisfied with the result, press the

[UNDO/REDO] key to undo the last recording, and

make recording again. Pressing the [UNDO/REDO]

key once returns track 1 to the "dry" sound.

Pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key again returns track 1

back to the "wet" sound.

Press the [PLAY] key while holding down the

[RECORD] key to start recording.

During recording in the “REC EFFECT mode”, the

[BOUNCE/REC EFF] key is flashing in red.

Press the [STOP] key to stop recording.

Press the [BOUNCE/REC EFF] key.

The unit exits the REC EFFECT mode, and the [BOUNCE/

REC EFF] key turns off, while the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL] key for track 1 lights steadily in green.

Press the [REWIND] key while holding down the

[STOP] key to locate to the beginning of the pro-

gram.

Press the [EFFECT] key while holding down the

[SHIFT] key to turn off the effect.

The [EFFECT] key turns off.

Press the [EFFECT] key.

The effect type selection screen appears, where "L39

Gtr Dist" is selected. All parameter are set as you did

during rehearsal.

When entering the REC EFFECT mode, the [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] key for track 1 flashes. You can

select any track to be recorded from among tracks

1 through 6 by pressing the appropriate [TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL] key.

In this example, you are going to record to track 1,

so you do not have to change the setting.

If the effect is set to OFF, press the [EFFECT] key

while holding down the [SHIFT] key to switch it to

ON.

When applying the insert effect, you can adjust the

recording level by the "Out Level" parameter.

Before starting recording, check/adjust the record-

ing level by following the procedure below. Note

that the channel fader, [MASTER] fader, EQ and pan

only affect the monitor sound.

1. Use the [JOG] dial to highlight the "Out Level"

parameter.

2. Press the [RECORD] key to monitor the input.

3. Press the [PLAY] key to start playback from the

beginning.

4. While monitoring the playback sound with

applying the effect, adjust the "Out Level" value

appropriately using the [JOG] dial so that the

PEAK indicator does not light frequently.

5. After setting the level, locate to the beginning of

the program.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, you can select an effect type

only from among

L39 through L44

If you enter the REC EFFECT mode from the

condition in which an effect type for the loop effect

is selected, "

L39: Gtr Dist

" will be initially selected.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, if you recall a scene in which

the loop effect is used, the effect type is not changed.

Or, when a track the insert effect is applied to is

selected, if you recall a scene in which a track the

insert effect is applied to is selected, the track

selection is not recalled. In such a case, use the

[TRACK

STATUS/TRACK SEL]

key to change the selection.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, You cannot set "

Scene

Sequence

" and "

Digital In

" to

. If you enter the

REC EFFECT mode while one or both of these are set

to ON, the unit automatically sets it (them) to OFF.

• In the REC EFFECT mode, you cannot playback or

record tracks 7 and 8 (the

[TRACK STATUS/TRACK

SEL]

keys never light up).

• To rerecord a desired part of a track with applying

the insert effect, it will be a good idea to use the auto

punch-in/out function. See page

for details about

the auto punch-in/out.

If you like, try recording in the similar manner by select-

ing the other effect type.

Advanced Operations

• Parameters for distortion effects

(Parameter type: DISTORTION)

Effect types No.39 through 42 (shown in "Effect type list" on

page 49) are distortion types.

Each of these has 11 parameters as shown below.

1. Dist Type

Selects a distortion type.

Each effect type has following distortion

type options. (An underlined option is

the default.)

L39: Acous, Rythm, OvDrv, Dist, Blues, Fuzz,

Lead, Metal

L40: Bass1, Bass2, Bass3

L41: Kick, Snar1, Snar2

L42: Voic1, Voic2, Voic3

See the table on the right for details

about each type.

2. Dist Gain

3. Warm

Adjusts the distortion gain.

Range: 1 to 15 (The default depends on

the distortion type selected. See the table

on the right.)

4. Bass

Makes the sound warmer when On.

Options: ON, OFF (default: ON)

5. Middle

Adjusts the low frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

6. Treble

Adjusts the mid frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

7. Noise Gate

Adjusts the high frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 5)

8. Out Level

Turns on or off the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 1 to 99 (default: OFF)

9. Delay Time

Sets the output level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

10. Feedback

Sets the delay time.

Range: 5 ms to 1200 ms (default: 250 ms)

11. Delay Level

Sets the feedback level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 40)

Sets the delay level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 0)

Acoustic You can get an electric-acoustic

guitar sound

Rhythm You can get a slight distortion when

picking the guitar strongly.

Over Drive You can get a smooth distortion like

driving a tube amplifier.

Distortion You can get a hard distortion like

driving a three-stacked amplifier.

Blues You can get a fat overdrive sound.

Fuzz You can get a rough sound with a fat

low frequency range.

Lead You can get a bright and smooth

distortion.

Metal You can get a shred sound.

Bass 1 Simulates a bass amplifier.

Bass 2 You can get a sound like recording a

distorted bass sound through a line.

Bass 3 You can get a fat bass sound.

Kick You can distort a kick sound

appropriately.

Snar 1 You can distort a snar sound appropriately.

Snar 2 You can distort a snar sound excessively.

Voic 1 You can get a smooth distortion.

Voic 2 You can get a boomy and bright distortion.

Voic 3 You can get a bullhorn sound.

Details of each distortion type

Each distortion type (selectable for each of effect

types No.39 through 42) can apply the effect as de-

scribed below.

• Distortion types for "L39: Gtr Dist"

The default distortion gain value depends on the

distortion type selected.

• Distortion types for "L40: Bass Dist"

• Distortion types for "L41: Drum Dist"

• Distortion types for "L42: Voice Dist"

Name Comment Default

Dist Gain

Advanced Operations

• Parameters for distortion effects

(Parameter type: AMP SIMULATION)

Effect type No.43 (shown in "Effect type list" on page 49) is

the amp simulation type.

This effect type has 11 parameters as shown below.

1. Type

Selects an amplifier type to be simulated.

Options: Brit800, TremoRect, MetalRect,

ClassA30, Fatman (default: Brit800)

See the table on the right for details

about each type.

2. Amp Gain

3. Bass

Adjusts the distortion gain.

Range: 1 to 15 (The default depends on

the distortion type selected. See the table

on the right.)

4. Middle

Adjusts the low frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 10)

5. Treble

Adjusts the mid frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 10)

6. Presence

Adjusts the high frequency response.

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 10)

7. Noise Gate

Adjusts the presence (the feeling of be-

ing "up front").

Range: 0 to 10 (default: 0)

8. Out Level

Turns on or off the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 1 to 99 (default: OFF)

9. Delay Time

Sets the output level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

10. Feedback

Sets the delay time.

Range: 5 ms to 1200 ms (default: 250 ms)

11. Delay Level

Sets the feedback level of the distortion.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 40)

Sets the delay level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 0)

Details of each amplifier types

Five guitar amplifier types can be simulated.

Each amplifier type has its own unique character as

described below.

The default distortion gain value depends on the

amplifier type selected.

British 800 Amplifier

Simulates the 800-series British tube

amplifier, a synonym for "rock".

The king of the rock sound of the

80's hard rock and heavy metal.

Distorted raging sound.

Tremo Rect Amplifier

Simulates the American combo

model amplifier, designed to get

high gain sound for the 90's hard

rock and heavy metal.

Fat bass and raging distorted sound.

Metal Panel Recti Amplifier

Simulates the amp head of the high

gain amp series, same as the Tremo

Recti Amplifiers. Deep and well-sepa-

rated distortion and heavy sound.

Suitable for the metal sound.

British Class A 30 Amplifier

Simulates a most popular British

sound tube amplifier.

The preamp section is designed us-

ing the class A circuit for creating

the fat and warm sound.

Usually used in the range between

clear and crunch sound, but some-

times used with the higher gain to

get a harder distortion.

Fat Bass Amplifier

Simulates the American combo am-

plifier designed as a bass amplifier

but used by many guitarists because

of its fat presence sound.

Suitable for jazz and blues with its

clear and crunch sound, however,

because you can get a raging distor-

tion that you cannot expect from an

ordinary bass amplifier when rais-

ing the gain, It can be used for a wide

range of genres.

Name Comment Default

Amp Gain

• Parameters for distortion effects

(Parameter type: MIC SIMULATION)

Effect type No.44 (shown in "Effect type list" on page

49) is the mic simulation type.

This effect type has 3 parameters as shown below.

Brit800

TremoRect

MetalRect

ClassA30

FatMan

Advanced Operations

TCon 3k

Trad Condenser 3k (Low cut: Off)

Simulates the sound of a multipurpose

professional condenser microphone with

a large diaphragm.

Its warm and transparent sound is suit-

able for a vocal, as well as a drum over-

head or guitar amplifier.

TCon 3k LC

Trad Condenser 3k (Low cut: On)

Simulates the sound of "TCon 3k" above

with the Low Cut switch to On.

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

as a result from placing a microphone in

close proximity to the signal source.

TCon 414

Trad Condenser 414 (Low cut: On)

Simulates the sound of one of the most

popular condenser microphones in profes-

sional studios together with the Classic

condenser 87. You can get a high-fidelity

clean sound of an acoustic piano.

TCon 414 LC1

Trad Condenser 414 (Low cut: 75 Hz)

Simulates the sound of "TCon 414" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (75 Hz).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies.

TCon 414 LC2

Trad Condenser 414 (Low cut: 150 Hz)

Simulates the sound of "TCon 414" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (150 Hz).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

more than "TCon 414LC1".

TDyn 112

Trad Dynamic 112

Simulates the sound of a dynamic micro-

phone suitable for a kick.

You can get a clean and powerful sound

by applying it to a kick or bass.

It has a slightly boosted low frequencies.

Details of microphone output types

18 options are available for the microphone output

type, as shown below.

1. IN

Selects a microphone input type.

Options: US Dyn 58 (dynamic type), MCon2

(condenser type)

Default: US Dyn 58

2. Out

3. Gate

Selects a microphone output type to be simu-

lated.

Options: TCon3k, TCon3k LC, TCon414,

TCon414LC1, TCon414LC2, TDyn112, GDyn421,

GDyn421LC3, GDyn421LC2, GDyn421LC1,

GDyn421SPE, MCon1, MCon2, MConV, UsDyn58,

VCon47, VCon87, VCon87 LC

Default: VCon87

See the next page for details.

Adjusts the noise gate.

Options: OFF, 0 to 99 (default: OFF)

4. Out Level Sets the output level.

Range: 0 to 99 (default: 80)

GDyn 421

German Dynamic 421

Simulates the sound of a dynamic micro-

phone which is frequently used for record-

ing a tom-tom.

Suitable for recording a skin percussion

because of its powerful attack feeling with

a high frequency peak.

GDyn 421 LC3

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: 3)

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (3).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies.

GDyn 421 LC2

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: 2)

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (2).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

more than "GDyn 421 LC3".

GDyn 421 LC1

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: 1)

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (1).

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

more than "GDyn 421 LC2".

GDyn 421 SPE

German Dynamic 421 (Low cut: SPE)

Simulates the sound of "GDyn 421" above

with the Low Cut switch to On (SPE).

You can considerably suppress boosted low

frequencies. Suitable for a speech.

MCon 1

Modern Condenser 1

Simulates the sound of a modern con-

denser microphone which has a wider dy-

namic range and bright sound. It offers a

warm tube sound, making a vocal or acous-

tic guitar as if it were recorded by a con-

denser microphone.

MCon 2

Modern Condenser 2

Simulates the sound of a condenser micro-

phone offering wide dynamic range, like

"MCon 1". It offers a flat frequency re-

sponse and natural sound.

MCon V

Modern Condenser V

Simulates the sound of a modern tube mi-

crophone with vintage feel.

It offers a deep and natural sound which

only tube microphones can provide.

Suitable for a vocal, piano and ensemble.

Us Dyn 58

US Dynamic 58

Simulates the most popular dynamic hand-

held vocal microphone.

High-end and low-end frequencies are not

extended as compared with a condenser

microphone.

VCon 47

Vintage Condenser 47

Simulates a professional tube microphone

with a large diaphragm that offers clean

and dry sound.

Suitable for an acoustic guitar and brass.

VCon 87

Vintage Condenser 87 (Low cut: Off)

Simulates the sound of a classic and his-

toric model used for vocals and strings fre-

quently in professional studios.

Provides outstanding warm sound among

condenser microphones.

VCon 87 LC

Vintage Condenser 87 (Low cut: On)

Simulates the sound of "VCon 87" with low

cut "On".

You can suppress boosted low frequencies

as a result from placing a microphone in

close proximity to the signal source.

Advanced Operations

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

Digital recording

You can digitally record an external digital source to the VF80, or stereo output signals of the VF80 to an external

digital recorder. This section describes how to make digital recording between the VF80 and an external digital

device. Note that the VF80 can only handle S/P DIF format digital data.

Recording an external source onto the VF80 digitally

The following describes how to record an external S/P DIF digital source (such as CD, MD and DAT) onto the

VF80.

• When recording a digital source onto the VF80, make

sure that the source signal is the "

44.1 kHz, 16-bit

" S/P

DIF digital format.

• You can record an external S/P DIF digital source only

onto Tracks 7/8 of the VF80. If you want to record it

onto other tracks, first record it onto Tracks 7/8 and

then move the data to other tracks using the track

exchange function.

Selecting a program to be recorded

When more than one program exists, select the desired

program using the program select function before re-

cording.

See "Selecting a program" in "Recorder function" about

how to select a program.

Selecting the digital input

In the "Digital In" menu of the setup mode, select "On."

See "Setting digital input" in "Setup mode" about how to

select "On."

When set to "On", you can record an incoming S/P DIF

signal from the [S/P DIF / DATA INPUT] connector onto

Track 7/8 of the VF80.

After setting "Digital In" menu, press the [EXIT/NO] key

to exit the setup mode.

When receiving a correct S/P DIF digital signal, "DIGI

IN" is shown steadily on the screen. When a correct

digital signal is not received, "DIGI IN" blinks on the

screen. In such a case, check the connection and set-

tings of the external source device.

Selecting a track to record

Press the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] key of Tracks

7/8.

The key lighting in green change to flashing in red.

Starting to record

Set the Track 7/8 and Master faders to the "0" position.

Start recording of the VF80 by pressing the [PLAY] key

while holding down the [RECORD] key, and start play-

back of the external digital device.

"When recording a digital signal, you cannot adjust the

input level of the VF80." "To get the optimum record-

ing level, adjust the output level of the source."

The level meters for Tracks 7/8 on the screen shows

the input levels.

<Note>

During digital recording, the level meters for the

stereo outputs (L and R) are not active.

Rotating the [PHONES] knob clockwise to monitor the

source sound.

After finishing recording, stop the VF80 by pressing

the [STOP] key , as well as stop the external digital de-

vice.

<Note>

After you have finished the digital recording, return

the "Digital In" setting to "

Off.

When "

", you cannot record any analog signal

onto Tracks 7/8.

Advanced Operations

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPA N

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

ST OUT L, R

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI Sound Source

MIDI Sequencer

MIDI OUT

Master Recorder

MIDI clock & song position ponter

INPUT

Recording the VF80 stereo output signals digitally onto an external digital device

You can record the stereo output signal digitally onto an external digital device via the [S/P DIF/DATA OUTPUT]

connector.

You do not have to carry out any special operation for outputting an S/P DIF digital signal from the [S/P DIF/

DATA OUTPUT] connector, because it is always output there.

All you have to do for mixing down to an external digital device digitally is to connect the device to the [S/

P DIF/DATA OUTPUT] connector. You can perform the digital mixdown during the mixdown process described

in "Mixdown" of the "Basic recording/playback" chapter as well as in the mastering mode described in "Master-

ing mode" of this chapter.

MIDI clock sync system

By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map contained in the VF80, and

by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer according to the setting, a hardware type MIDI sequencer

can be synchronized as a MIDI clock slave. Consequently, in this system, the VF80 will be the master and the MIDI

sequencer the slave.

Connecting external equipment

Connect the VF80 MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the MIDI

sequencer.

Set the MIDI sequencer for “external sync mode

(EXTERNAL SYNC) by MIDI clock.”

Refer to the Owners Manual of the equipment in use

for details.

Advanced Operations

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPA N

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2 3 4 5 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

ST OUT L, R

MIDI IN

MIDI Sound Source

MIDI OUT

MMC

Computer System

with

MMC/MTC software

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

Master Recorder

Setup of the VF80

Because the MIDI clock and song position pointer will

be output from the VF80, set the SETUP mode “MIDI

sync signal output setting” to “CLK.”

Refer to page “126”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output

setting” for correct operating procedures.

The meter in the desired bar can be set by “Time

signature setting” of the SETUP mode.

Refer to page “122”, SETUP mode “Time Signature Setting”

for operating procedure.

Tempo in the desired bar can be set by “Tempo setting”

of the SETUP mode.

Refer to page “124”, SETUP mode “Tempo Setting” for

operating procedure.

Set the SETUP mode “Metronome setting” to “On” if

click sound is to be output according to the setup

tempo map.

Refer to page “125”, SETUP mode “Metronome setting” for

operating procedure.

Confirming the MIDI clock sync

During recording and at playback following the

recording, the time base (BAR/BEAT/CLK) is displayed

in accordance to the setup tempo map, and the MIDI

clock and song position pointer is also output.

Confirm that the travel position (BAR/BEAT/CLK) of

the VF08 and the travel position of the synchronized

MIDI sequencer are matched.

If correct sync cannot be obtained, re-check the

connections/cables and setting of both equipment.

<Note>

In the VF80, the “ABS 0” position is set at “-002BAR/1BEAT

/00CLK.” This setting is made in consideration of the

time required (it will not sync immediately) for the MIDI

sequencer, etc. to enter into sync. As a result, if the VF80

is played back from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync will be

completed by the time it reaches the first bar, and will

thus synchronize from head of the tune.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, and then change the

time base display to BAR/BEAT/CLK.

Various ways of recording can be conducted while

synchronizing the VF80 and the MIDI sequencer with

the MIDI clock.

Executing of recording

MTC sync/MIDI machine control system

The following will explain synchronization by the MTC (MIDI time code) output and the computer controlling

system using MMC (MIDI machine control). In this system, the VF80 will be the master and the computer (with

sequence software) will be the slave. The VF80 will attach any desired offset (time difference) against ABS time

(absolute time) and output it as MTC in any desired frame rate. It can also carry out the proper operation upon

receiving an MMC from outside. In this case, because the VF80 can setup a DEVICE ID number by the SETUP mode

“MIDI Device ID Setting” menu, a multiple number of the VF80’s can be separately controlled by changing the DEVICE

ID numbers in the transmitted message from the computer.

Advanced Operations

Connecting to external equipment

Connect the VF80 MIDI IN/OUT to the computer (with

MIDI interface) MIDI IN/OUT.

MMC/MTC complied sequence software is activated in

the computer.

Setup of external equipment

Setup the following in the sequence software.

* Set to MTC external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC).

* Set for output of MMC.

* Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate.

* Set start time of the tune (which MTC time is to be the first

bar). Refer to precaution in regards to MTC offset, farther

on.

For details, refer to Owners Manual of the external

equipment.

Setup of the VF80

Because MTC will be output from the VF80, set to “MTC”

the SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output setting.”

Refer to page “126”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output

setting” for operating procedure.

Set a random offset time by the SETUP mode “MTC

offset time setting.”

Refer to page “127”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting”

for operating procedure.

In the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting,” whether

the MTC offset time setup in Step 2 should be output

(ABS) at the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf position or at the

001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK (bar, signature) must be

selected.

Refer to page “127”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode

setting” for operating procedure.

Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the

sequence software by “MTC Frame rate setting” of the

SETUP mode.

Refer to page “126”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting”

for operating procedure and details.

Set to the same figure as the sequence software MMC

device number by the SETUP mode “MIDI device ID

setting.”

When the sequence software transmits by “7F,” it means

“ALL DEVICE” and therefore, it need not be setup.

Refer to page “131”, SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting”

for operating procedure and details.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, and then change the

time base display to MTC.

By “

MTC offset time setting

” and “

MTC offset mode setting

,”

at what position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/00CLK)

should the setup MTC (MTC offset time) is to be output

is set. When setting the start time of the tune in the

sequence software by these setups, be careful of the

following points.

• Offset mode: For ABS

If playback is started from ABS 0, since MTC will be

output starting from the MTC offset time that has been

set, the start time of the tune set by the sequence software

must be set about 3 seconds later from the MTC offset

time that was setup. This will provide time because the

sequence software cannot sync immediately after MTC

is output. For example, if the initial setting of “

00h 59m

57s 00f 00sf

” is used, set the start time of the tune to “

01h

00m 00s 00f

.”

If playback is thus started from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0),

sync will be obtained by the time it reaches the first bar

and therefore it can be made to sync from the head of

the tune.

• Offset mode: For BAR

As mentioned before, because the “

ABS 0

” position is set

at the “

002BAR / 1BEAT / 00CLK

” position, the setup MTC

offset time can be set to the head of the tune without

taking into account the time until reaching sync, as

mentioned above. The length of the time two bars

beforehand will change in accordance to the first bar

setting for “

signature

” and “

tempo

.” For example, it will

be long if the tempo is set slow. This mode can be

effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC

in parallel, and when using MTC for the sync signal while

controlling the recorder with time base BAR/BEAT/CLK.

Confirming MTC sync/MMC

During recording and at playback after recording, time

base MTC is displayed according to the setting and MTC

is output at the same time.

Check that the VF80 traveling position (MTC) and the

traveling position of the sequence software in sync are

matched.

Send MMC commands such as PLAY, STOP and

LOCATE from the sequence software to see that the

VF80 will be properly controlled.

When a correct MIDI command (MMC or FEX) is received,

“MIDI” in the display will be lit for about 40msec.

There is no setting in the VF80 to receive MMC but it

will operate if a correct MIDI signal is input.

If sync and control cannot be done correctly, re-check

connections/cables and the setting of both equipment.

Execution of recording

Carry out various recordings while synchronizing the

VF80 and a MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock.

Advanced Operations

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2345 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

Sound Source

MTC

Computer System

with

MMC/MTC software

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

INPUT

External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode

Up to this point, synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with the VF80 as the master

and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave mode setting, the MIDI equipment can be set as the

master and the VF80 as the slave.

Connection to external equipment

Setup of external equipment

Connect MIDI OUT of the computer (with MIDI interface)

with MIDI IN of the VF80.

The computer sequence software complying to MMC/

MTC must be activated.

Sequence software is setup as follows.

* Set for output of MTC.

* Set frame rate of the MTC to be output.

* Confirm start time of the tune.

Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment

for details.

Setup of the VF80

Set to same frame rate as the sequence software by the

SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting.”

Refer to page “126”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting”

for operating procedure and details.

Set to the desired mode by the SETUP mode “MTC

offset mode setting.”

Refer to page “127”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode

setting” for operating procedure and details.

A random offset time can be set by the SETUP mode

“MTC offset time setting.”

Refer to page “127”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting”

for operating procedure and details.

4Set slave mode to “On” by the SETUP mode “Slave

mode setting.”

Refer to page “128”, SETUP mode “Slave mode setting”

for operating procedure and details.

Set slave type to “Vari” by the SETUP mode “Slave type

setting.”

Refer to page “128”, SETUP mode “Slave type setting” for

operating procedure and details.

Press the [TIME BASE SEL] key, to change the time

base display to MTC.

Confirming chase lock

When the sequence software is played, “CHASE” and

“MTC” in the display will be light and the chase lock

will be completed.

Check that the MTC output by the sequence software

and MTC time displayed in the VF80 are the same.

When the sequence software stops, MTC will be

interrupted and the VF80 will also stop.

“CHASE” in the display will change from lit to blinking.

During FF/REW of the sequence software, the VF80 will

remain stopped but upon starting to record, the VF80

will immediately chase lock.

Should it not be possible to chase lock, re-check

connections / cables and all settings.

Advanced Operations

The position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/00CLK) when the

setup MTC (MTC offset time) should be output was setup

by the “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode

setting.” In accordance to start time of the tune set by

the sequence software, setup as explained below.

Offset mode: For ABS

Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the

start time of the tune set by the sequence software.

Because the recorder cannot immediately chase lock

after input of MTC, in order to sync the unit from head

of the tune, set the preroll using the sequence software,

and playback from before the actual head of the tune to

allow the recorder to enter into sync by the time it arrives

at the head of the tune.

Offset mode: For BAR/BEAT

The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the

start time of the tune set by the sequence software.

Because the “ABS 0” position is set at the “002BAR/1BEAT/

00CLK” position in the unit, as mentioned before, the

preceding time required for sync is already set.

The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in

length depending on the first bar’s “signature setting” and

“tempo setting” mentioned before. For example, it will

be longer if the tempo is slowed down.

Execution of recording

Carry out various recordings while the recorder is

chase locked to the sequence software.

Sync signal “Vari” of the “Slave mode setting” menu:

When the VF80 is made to chase lock by MTC only,

variable pitch will be constantly applied by external

MTC. If a digital signal is output to an external digital

equipment from the VF80, it will not be able to follow

the speed difference (MTC speed difference of the

master) of the VF80 and the external digital equipment,

in some cases, may not be able to input a continuous

digital signal.

As a counter measure, the sync signal should be set to

“Free” by the “Slave mode setting” menu. Using this

setting, the VF80 will enter self operation by the internal

clock, after completion of chase lock, and it will be

possible to supply a stable digital signal to the external

equipment.

Under this setting, when MTC drift between the master

recorder and slave recorder exceeds 10 frames, the VF80

will assume that chase lock has been disengaged and the

slave recorder will carry out position matching again

with the master unit (re-chase operation).

During the re-chase operation, sound output will be

muted and the digital signal will also be interrupted.

If it is within 10 frames, the slave recorder will continue

to run while admitting this drift.

<Notes>

• Chase lock of the VF80 by MTC only is permissible

when speed difference of the MTC from the master is

within +/- 5.6%.

Against the MTC within this range, variable pitch will

be constantly applied internally for chasing. Chase

lock, however, will not function against MTC at a speed

difference outside this range. Also, when the master

speed difference is large, it is advised to let the VF80

learn the master speed by entering PLAY prior to

recording. By doing so, it will be lock faster from the

second and later sessions.

• Normally, when “

Setup of slave type

” is set to “

Vari

,”

the VF80 will be constantly controlled by vari-pitch

and follow the MTC, which is the master.

However, if the digital input is set to “

” via the SETUP

mode “

Setup of digital input

,” it will be in “

Word clock

external sync operation

” by the digital signal (S/P DIF)

that is input.

Therefore, it must be noted that when “

Setup of digital

input

” is executed, even though “

Setup of slave type

”

is set to “

Vari

,” it will not follow by application of vari-

pitch and upon completion of lock, it will change to

external sync operation by the digital input signal.

Save/Load of Song data

Trk 1&2 Trk 3&4 Trk 21&22 Trk 23&24

Program 1 (P01) Program 2 (P02) Program 99 (P99)

Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7

& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13

& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &

19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24

Program 1 (P01) Program 2 (P02) Program 99 (P99)

Save/Load of song data

You can save or load song data (including audio and setup data) using a digital audio recorder via the S/P DIF

digital signal, as well as using a optional CD-RW drive (Model CD-1A).

This function allows you to save finished or unfinished song data to a digital recorder or a optional CD-RW

drive, and load the data later.

******About song data******

There are two methods of saving/loading song data depending on the digital signals used to handle the

data, which are S/PDIF digital and CD-RW drive. The data format and time required for the save/load

operations are different between each method.

•Using the S/PDIF digital signal (you can save/load data for each program individually.):

Following to five seconds of the pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), the song data is output to an

external digital audio device such as a DAT recorder.

The audio data is divided into data blocks of track pairs (shown in black in the diagram below) and transferred.

To save data for Real tracks 1 through 8, 4 two-track data are transferred. To save all tracks including the Additional

tracks in addition to the Real tracks, 12 two-track data are transferred. Therefore, it will take about 4 times as much

as the recorded time of a program (from ABS 0 to REC END) to save the Real tracks 1 through 8 of the program, while

it will take about 12 times to save all the data including the Additional tracks.

When loading song data from the external device to the VF80 via the S/PDIF digital signal, data is transferred with

two-track data blocks, as with the same way as saving data from the VF80 to the external device. (See also <Notes>

on the next page.)

•Using a CD-RW/CD-R disc (you can save/load data for each program individually.):

See the following <Note>.

When using a CD-RW/CD-R discs, all audio data including both the Real and Additional tracks (shown in black in

the diagram below) is transferred simultaneously. Therefore, you can save or load a program much faster than

using the S/PDIF signal. Note that no pilot tone or beep sound is recorded when saving data to a CD-RW/CD-R discs.

If song data to be saved requires more space than the available disk space, you can save the data to more than one

disk (up to 99 disks). You can also save/load data by the WAV file format. In the save/load operation using the

WAV file, you can specify any track(s) to be saved or loaded, as well as all tracks.

<Note>

To save/load using a CD-RW/CD-R disc, you must install the optional CD-RW drive

in the VF80.

For the detailed information about the CD-RW drive, contact your dealer or the

nearest FOSTEX sales office. See 134 page about how to install the CD-RW drive in

the VF80.

Save/Load of Song data

REC END (07m 00s)

of real track

REC END (10m 00s)

of additional track

seven minutes

Additional

Tracks

Real Tracks

DAT

Save

•Memory data:

AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT data and Start/End/To points,

Scene memories 00 through 99, Marks 00 through 99 (only can be saved/loaded using CD-RW drive)

•Timebase:

ABS, MTC or BAR/BEAT/CLK

•Setup mode:

Bar/beat setting, tempo setting, metronome on/off, preroll time, MIDI synchronization output signal

setting, MTC offset time, MTC offset mode, REC protect setting, slave mode on/off, and slave type setting

Fader fix mode setting, fader recall mode setting

•On/off settings for auto play mode and auto return mode

•Vari pitch on/off and pitch data

•Setup mode:

DIGITAL IN and DIGITAL OUT settings, bar/beat resolution on/off setting, device ID setting and drive

select setting

The VF80 song data only can be saved to or loaded from digital recorders that can handle 16 bit, 44.1 kHz

linear digital data with S/PDIF format (such as DAT recorders).

When saving all data including both real and Additional track data using the S/PDIF digital signal, note the

following.

Only the data recorded within the time duration between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is saved.

Therefore, if the recorded time of Additional tracks is longer than the Real tracks, only the Additional track data

within the time duration between ABS 0 and REC END of the Real tracks is saved.

In the example shown on the right, the Additional

tracks have data from "00m 00s" to "10m 00s", while

the Real tracks have data from "00m 00s" to "07m 00s".

If you are going to save all tracks, the Additional track

data from "00m 00s" to "07m 00s" will be saved but

the rest will not be saved.

In such a case, you can solve the problem by setting

the time length of saved data to 10 minutes by using

the "Save Length" screen mentioned later (see "step

4" on page 99). Note that the maximum save length

is 59 minutes 59 seconds.

The other way to solve the problem is to exchange

the Additional track data and the Real track data

before saving data. You should be careful not to lose

the Additional track data in this operation. See page

68 about the "track exchange operation".

Saving/loading data using the S/PDIF digital signal

Save/Load of Song data

Digital equipment

Flashing

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

VF80

S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT

Saving data using the S/PDIF digital signal

You can save data using the S/PDIF digital signal via the [S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT] (coaxial) jack.

• Use an external digital recorder that supports 44.1 kHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF80,

Connecting to an external digital recorder

Connect the [S/P DIF DATA OUTPUT] jack to the digital

input jack of the external digital recorder (DAT, etc.).

<Note>

Do not do anything, such as unplug the connecting

cable, that interrupts the digital signal until the saving

operation is completed. Otherwise, the unit may

generates a noise which damages an external recorder.

• If your digital recorder only provide the optical digital

input jack and does not provide the coaxial jack, use

the optional COP-1 (optical/coaxial converter).

• Do not connect digital signals for both directions

between the VF80 and the external recorder (i.e. the

digital output of the VF80 to the digital input of the

external recorder and the digital output of the external

recorder to the digital input of the VF80), which may

form a digital loop and cause feedback.

Setting the external recorder

Set the sampling frequency to 44.1 kHz (the same as

the VF80).

Set the input source to "digital input" to accept the

signal from the VF80.

Some machine also needs to select the clock reference

to "external" when setting the input source to "digital

input". See the operation manual of the machine for

the detailed information.

<Note>

If you cannot hear the input signal or you hear

digital noise when monitoring the source signal of

the external digital recorder, check the connections,

cables and settings of both the VF80 and the external

recorder.

• See the operation manual of the external recorder for the

detailed information.

Saving data

You can save data via the "Save PGM" menu in the

setup mode.

• Output signal options: S/PDIF and IDE (CD-1A)

• Program options: P01 to P99 (an individual Program)

• Track options:

* When using S/PDIF:

Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24

or Tracks 17-24.

* When using IDE (CD-1A):

All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks

individually when saving by the WAV file format).

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Save PGM" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

to which the data is saved. "IDE" flashes.

• "IDE" should be selected when saving or loading data via

CD-RW/CD-R.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys to select

"SPDIF" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the program

to be saved.

The program number currently selected flashes, while

the data size of the program is shown.

While a program number is flashing, you can select

the desired program to be saved.

Save/Load of Song data

Flashing

Use the [JOG] dial to select the program to be saved

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the "Save Length" screen.

Initially, the recorded time length of the selected

program (ABS 00 to REC END) is shown as the time

length of data saving. Normally you do not need to

edit the length but you may edit it to the desired value

if needed.

Flashing

For example, if the actual recorded time is 9 min. 00

sec., you can make the length of the data to be saved

shorter or longer than 9 min. 00 sec., as long as the

length does not exceed 59 min.59 sec.

The initially displayed value here is the length of the

Real track, therefore, as noted earlier, you may edit

the value to match the length of the Additional track

if it is longer.

To edit the save length

Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the flashing field

between "minutes" and "seconds".

Use the [JOG] dial to set the value for the flashing

field.

Flashing

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to

be saved.

Select tracks to be saved.

Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the blinking field

between "From" and "To".

Use the [JOG] dial to set the track number for the

blinking field.

For the "From" field, you can select from 1, 9 and 17.

For the "To" field, you can select a higher value than

the "From" field value among 8, 16 and 24.

Accordingly, you can set "Save Track Area" to one of

the following.

"From 1 To 8", "From 1 to 16", "From 1 To 24", "From 9 To

16", "From 9 To 24", and "From 17 To 24"

<Note>

When you save tracks including Additional tracks,

read <Notes for saving data using the S/PDIF digital

signal> on page 97 before executing the save

operation.

After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key

again.

The display shows "Rec Start Recorder!" together with

the program and tracks to be saved, and "Sure?"

flashes. If you are sure to start saving data to the

recorder, go on to the next step.

After checking all preparations on the external

recorder are made, start it recording.

It may be a good idea to put a Start-ID (for DAT) or

set a locate memory at the starting position so that

you can easily find the position when you load the

data later.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key immediately after the

external recorder starts recording.

The display shows something like the one below. After

a few seconds, the unit starts saving the data and "Wait

time" starts counting down.

For the first several seconds, the VF80 transmits the

pilot signal that will be a reference for locating the

tape position during the load operation, and the actual

data saving starts from the position at which "Wait

Time" starts counting down.

Data is saved in 2-track unit. When the data saving is

completed, "Completed!" appears on the screen and

the VF80 stops.

<Note>

If you interrupts saving before completing, the saved

data is invalid.

Stop the external recorder.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)

repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.

• To cancel each operation or to return to the previous

screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the

[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the

key returns to the previous screen level and finally

exits the setup mode.

Flashing

100

Save/Load of Song data

Flashing

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

Digital Equipment

VF80

S/P DIF DATA INPUT

Loading data using the S/PDIF signal

You can load data using the S/PDIF digital signal via the [S/P DIF DATA INPUT] (coaxial) jack.

*Use an external recorder that supports 44.1 kHz sampling frequency (the same as the VF80).

Connecting to an external recorder

Connect the [S/P DIF DATA INPUT] jack to the digital

output jack of the external digital recorder.

<Note>

Do not do anything, such as unplug the coaxial cable,

that interrupts the digital signal until the loading

operation is completed. Otherwise, the unit may

generates a noise which damages an external recorder.

• If your digital recorder only provide the optical digital

input jack and does not provide the coaxial jack, use

the optional COP-1 (optical/coaxial converter).

• Do not connect digital signals for both directions

between the VF80 and the external recorder (i.e. the

digital output of the VF80 to the digital input of the

external recorder and the digital output of the external

recorder to the digital input of the VF80), which may

form a digital loop and cause feedback.

Setting the external recorder

Make preparations of the external recorder for

outputting the digital signal.

Locate the beginning of the pilot signal for the song

data.

• See the operation manual of the external recorder for the

detailed information.

Loading data

• Input signal options: S/PDIF and IDE (CD-1A)

• Program options: P01 to P99 (an individual Program)

• Track options:

* When using S/PDIF:

Tracks 1-8, Tracks 1-16, Tracks 1-24, Tracks 9-16, Tracks 9-24

or Tracks 17-24.

* When using IDE (CD-1A):

All tracks (1-24) is selected automatically. (You can select tracks

individually when saving by the WAV file format).

You can load data via the "Load PGM" menu in the

setup mode.

Press the SETUP key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Load PGM" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the recorder

from which the data is loaded. "IDE" flashes.

Use the [JOG] dial or [CURSOR] keys to set "Load

Device Select" to "SPDIF" and press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a load

destination program to which data is loaded.

A program number currently selected blinks, followed

by its program name. The data size of the current

program is also shown. When a program number is

flashing, you can select the desired load destination

program.

Flashing

101

Save/Load of Song data

You can select a load destination program from existing

programs on the current drive as well as "New PGM".

When selecting "New PGM", a new program is created.

• If you load data to a program in which data is

already recorded, the newly loaded data

overwrites the current data track by track.

Consequently, on each overwritten track, the

loaded data becomes valid while the current data

is erased.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the program to which

data is loaded and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting tracks to

be loaded.

Select tracks to be loaded.

Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the flashing field

between "From" and "To".

Use the [JOG] dial to set the track number for the

flashing field.

For the "From" field, you can select from 1, 9 and 17.

For the "To" field, you can select from 8, 16 and 24.

For example, if you select "From 1 to 24", data for all

tracks (1 to 24) will be loaded.

After selecting tracks, press the [ENTER/YES] key

again.

The display shows something like the one below. A

load destination program (existing or new program)

to which the data is loaded and tracks to be loaded

are shown, while "Sure?" flashes.

<Note>

In the above step, if the VF80 does not lock to the

digital signal from the external digital recorder, the

following warning message appears on the display,

showing that the VF80 does not receive a correct S/

PDIF digital signal. So check the cable connection and

the digital output setting of the external digital

recorder.

When the VF80 is locking to the digital input signal,

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows "Play Start Player!".

Start playback of the external recorder.

After reading the pilot signal recorded when saving

the data, the data starts loading automatically.

When starts loading, the display shows something like

the one below, in which "Wait time" starts counting

down.

Data is loaded in 2-track unit.

While loading, the [TRACK STATUS/TRACK SEL] keys

for channels 1 and 2 flash, while the input levels are

displayed by level meters 1 and 2.

When the data loading is completed, "Completed!"

appears on the screen.

<Note>

If you quit loading before completing, the loaded

data is invalid.

Stop the external recorder.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)

repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.

• To cancel each operation or to return to the previous

screen before pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, press the

[EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key). Each press of the

key returns to the previous screen level and finally

exits the setup mode.

Flashing

102

Save/Load of Song data

Please read this first!

Save/Load using CD-RW/CD-R

By installing the optional CD-RW drive (Model CD-1A) to the VF80, you can save or load data in the

FDMS-3 or WAV file format using a CD-RW/CD-R disc. In addition, you can create an audio CD (CD-

DA) or load audio data from an audio CD.

Please read the notes below first before performing the save/load operation.

Save/load of Song Data Using a CD-RW drive

The save/load operation using a CD-RW/CD-R disk is performed in the following manners.

• Save

You can only a single selected program data to a

disc regardless of the program data amount.

You cannot save more than one program data even

if there are enough disc space.

However, you can save a program data to more

than one disc if the data amount is larger than a

disc space.

As shown on the right, you can save almost all

necessary information such as song data of all

tracks (real and additional tracks) and mixer scene

data.

• Load

The data loading using a CD-RW drive is taken

place after a “new program” is created in the cur-

rent drive (the load destination).

You cannot overwrite an existing program with

the loaded data.

The newly created program is numbered the next

number to the highest existing program number.

• Creating an audio CD

You can make an audio CD by recording sound data of tracks 1 and 2 between the “Start point” and “End

point” to a CD-RW/CD-R disc. It is also possible to record some mastered materials continuously.

• Loading an audio CD data

You can load a material on a (commercial or created) audio CD to a program of the VF80.

Audio data is loaded to a “new program” automatically created by the VF80, which is the same way as

backup data loading. The VF80 never overwrites the existing program.

Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7

& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13

& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &

19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24

Program 1 (P01) Program 2 (P02) Program 99 (P01)

Save

Current drive of the VF80

Trk 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 & 6 &7

& 8 & 9 & 10 & 11 & 12 & 13

& 14 & 15 & 16 & 17 & 18 &

19 & 20 & 21 & 23 & 24

Program 1 (P01) Program 2 (P02) New Program

Load

Current drive of the VF80

103

Save/Load of Song data

With an optional CD-RW drive, you can use not only CD-RW discs but also CD-R discs. Note that

CD-R discs has some restrictions as shown below.

The writing and reading speeds for data save and load of the VF80 are automatically set as below.

• Writing speed: according to a CD-RW drive used, however the maximum speed is 8 times.

• Reading speed: according to a CD-RW drive used.

The writing speed depends on a CD-RW drive but it is limited to 8 times.

For save/load of the VF80 data, use discs that can be written at 4 times or higher speed. Do not use

discs that only can be written at real-time or twice speed.

<Note>

A CD-RW/CD-R disc on which VF80 data is recorded can only be played by Fostex machines. Do not

play it by non-Fostex devices. The drive or system used may be damaged.

However, a CD-RW/CD-R disc with audio CD format created by the Fostex machine can be played by

general machines such as audio CD players.

(If an audio CD is made using a CD-RW disc, it can be played

back only by a player that supports CD-RW playback. You cannot playback such a disc by a conventional CD

player that does not support CD-RW playback.)

You can save (record) data to a disc as many times

required. Note that when saving new data, it is recorded

after the previously recorded data is erased. In other

words, every time you save new data, all disc data is

rewritten. (See “Saving data” described later.)

You can save (record) data to a disc only once.

You cannot save data to a recorded disc. You can, of

course, load data as many times as required.

CD-RW disc

CD-R disc

104

Save/Load of Song data

After turning on the VF80, insert a disc to the CD-RW

drive.

Press the [SETUP] key of the VF80 to enter the setup

mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

The following procedure describes how to save FDMS-3 song data.

We assume that the optional CD-RW drive (Model CD-1A) is already installed to the VF80 and a virgin CD-RW

or CD-R disc is set.

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) “Save PGM”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a save de-

vice, where “IDE” is flashing.

After selecting a program, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen as below.

<Note>

Do not carry out any VF80 key operation until the ac-

cess process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is completed.

Flashing

Saving data using a CD-RW drive (Backup)

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can select a desired

program number/title from among available programs

in the VF80 current drive. The recorded space of the

selected program is also shown.

If you select a program which requires more than one

disc for saving, the display shows the required num-

ber of discs (see the screen example below).

Use the [CURSOR <] key to select (highlight) “FDMS3”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a program

to be saved (the program number of the selected pro-

gram flashes).

flashing

Flashing recorded

space

number of

discs

Flashing

While “IDE” is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

After briefly showing the model name of the connected

CD-RW drive, the display shows the screen for select-

ing a save mode, where “BkUp” (backup) is flashing.

To save (backup) song data, select “BkUp”.

To make an audio CD, select “CD-DA” or “Setup”.

This procedure describes how to save song data, so

we select “BkUp” here.

See “making an audio CD” described later for details

about how to make an audio CD.

While “BkUp” flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a backup

mode (between FDMS-3 and WAV), where “WAV” is

flashing.

flashing

105

Save/Load of Song data

If an error occurs for some reason during the save

operation, the error message as below appears.

If it appears, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the previous screen before

performing the save operation.

Note that saved data before the error message ap-

pears is all invalid.

If you save data to more than one disc, we rec-

ommend to put a number on each disc in the

saving order (such as DISC-1, DISC-2, etc.) so

that you will easily know the order for inserting

discs when loading data.

In the description for saving data above, we assume

to use a non-recorded CD-RW/CD-R disc.

If you use a recorded disc (including a disc on which

computer data is recorded), also note the following.

By performing step 5 in the save operation proce-

dure shown above (“While “BkUp” is flashing, press

the [ENTER/YES] key”.) When a recorded disc is in-

serted, the display shows a warning message, fol-

lowed by the confirmation screen (where “Sure?”

flashes).

With this screen, you can choose whether erasing

the recorded data or ejecting the disc.

• To erase the existing (recorded) data

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while both “ERASE” and

“Sure?” are flashing.

The display shows the screen below and the VF80

starts erasing the disc.

As the erase process progresses, the number of

flashing “ * ” increases from left to right.

<Note>

You cannot abort the save operation before com-

pleted. Especially during the save operation to

more than one disc, if you happen to press the

[EXIT/NO]

key while removing or inserting a disc,

you have to redo the save operation from the

beginning with the first disc.

<Note>

If the message above appears while saving data

to a CD-R disc, you can no longer use the disc.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the Setup mode.

When saving data to more than one disc, the first disc

will be ejected when it is full (i.e. there is no more

recording space on the disc), while “Insert Disk!” ap-

pears on the screen.

After inserting the second disc, the VF80 automati-

cally resumes the save operation.

After completing the save operation, the final disc is

ejected and the above screen appears. (See <Note> be-

low).

Flashing Flashing

When completing the save operation, “Save Com-

pleted!” appears on the display (as shown below) and

the VF80 stops access to the drive, while the disc in

the CD-RW drive is automatically ejected.

While “B01” is shown, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The VF80 starts the save operation.

The recorded space shown on the display is counted

down while the save operation progresses.

It will take some time for saving all data. The follow-

ing display example shows that the data of the se-

lected program number is being saved to the backup

number “B01”.

In the example above, the selected program data will

be saved to a CD-RW/CD-R disc with the backup num-

ber “B01”. The program title is copied to the backup

title (you can not edit it).

By rotating the [JOG] dial when the above screen is

shown, you can also select “Eject”, besides “B01”.

If you select “Eject” and then press the [ENTER/YES]

key, the disc will be ejected.

106

Save/Load of Song data

Immediately after completing erasing the disc, the

display shows the same screen (for selecting a pro-

gram to be saved) which appears after step 5 is

performed. Hereafter, perform the same proce-

dure as described above.

Flashing Flashing

Increases as the process progresses.

If you try to save data to a recorded CD-R disc, the

display shows a warning message saying “Not Writ-

able”, followed by a message saying “Insert Disk” as

below.

• To eject the disc

Use the [JOG] dial to highlight “Eject” (flashing)

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The disc is ejected while the display shows “Insert

Disk!”.

By inserting a disc, you can start the save opera-

tion again from the beginning.

107

Save/Load of Song data

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the setup

menu.

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) “Load PGM”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a load de-

vice, where “IDE” is flashing.

Loading backup data from a CD-RW drive

<Note>

Do not carry out any VF80 key operation until

the access process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is

completed.

<Note>

If you load song data which is saved to more

than one disc, set DISC-1 first.

If you set the other disc and go on the follow-

ing procedure, the VF80 automatically recog-

nized that the disc order i s not correct and

the display shows

“Wrong Disk”

, followed by

“Illegal No!”

momentarily, and the disc is au-

tomatically ejected.

After turning on both the VF80, insert the disc to the

CD-RW drive.

While the desired backup number/title is shown on

the display, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for creating a new pro-

gram on the current drive, to which data will be loaded

(“New PGM” lights).

When you load song data which is saved to more

than one disc, the display also shows the disc num-

ber currently set. The example below shows DISC-

1 is set.

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can select a desired

program number/title from among available programs

in the VF80 current drive. You can also select “Eject”.

If you select “Eject” and press the [ENTER/YES] key,

the disc is ejected

Flashing

Light up

The following procedure describes how to load FDMS-3 song data.

We assume that the optional CD-RW drive (Model CD-1A) is already installed to the VF80 and a CD-RW or CD-

R disc on which the song data is recorded is set.

While “IDE” is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

After briefly showing the model name of the connected

CD-RW drive, the display shows the screen for select-

ing a load mode, where “BkUp” (backup) is flashing.

To load song data saved, select “BkUp”.

To load a material from an audio CD, select “CD-DA”.

This procedure describes how to load song data, so

we select “BkUp” here.

See “Loading from an audio CD” described later for de-

tails about how to load a material from an audio CD.

Flashing

While “BkUp” is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the backup number and title, as

well as recorded space.

Flashing

108

Save/Load of Song data

When completing the load operation, “Load Com-

pleted!” appears on the display (as shown below) and

the VF80 stops access to the drive, while the disc in

the CD-RW drive is automatically ejected.

As described earlier, when loading data from a CD-

RW drive, the VF80 creates a new program on the

current drive, which is the load destination.

Therefore, “New PGM” is shown on the right of the

flashing program number.

The program number for the newly created destina-

tion program is the next number to the highest exist-

ing program number.

For example, if there are 8 existing programs (“P01”

through “P08”) on the current drive, the newly cre-

ated program is numbered “P09”.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) to exit

the setup mode.

<Note>

If you rotate the

[JOG]

dial while the above screen

(

“Destn PGM Select”

) is shown, you can select an

existing program on the current drive as the desti-

nation. However, as mentioned earlier, when load-

ing data using CD-RW you cannot actually load

data to the existing program by overwriting the

program data.

If you press the

[ENTER/YES]

key (see the next step)

while selecting an existing program as the destina-

tion, the display shows

“Void!”

and the VF80 ig-

nores the operation.

While “New PGM” is shown, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The VF80 starts the load operation.

The recorded space shown on the display is counted

down while the load operation progresses.

It will take some time for loading all data.

The following display example shows that the data of

the backup number “B01” is being loaded to “P08”

which is newly created on the current drive.

<Note>

If there is not enough available space for loading

on the current drive, the display shows

“Disk Full!”

and the display returns to the previous screen.

<Note>

You cannot abort the load operation before com-

pleted.

When loading data from more than one disc, the first

disc will be ejected immediately after all disc data has

been loaded, while “Insert Disk!” appears on the screen.

After inserting the second disc, the VF80 automati-

cally resumes the load operation.

After completing loading all the discs, the above screen

appears.

If an error occur for some reason during the

load operation, the error message as below ap-

pears.

If it appears, press the [EXIT/NO] key.

The display returns to the previous screen be-

fore performing the load operation.

Note that loaded data before the error message

appears is all invalid.

Flashing

Light up

Flashing

109

Save/Load of Song data

Saving a WAV file

Song data can be saved to or load from a CD-R/CD-RW disc by the FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-

3) format, as well as by the WAV file format. As you can handle song data of the VF80 with a WAV file, it is

possible to directly import/export data from/to a personal computer, to playback/edit a data file with various

software applications, and to import a data file edited by a computer to the VF80.

About directory of a backup disk:

• A WAV file saved is recorded in the root directory (in the first layer) on the backup disk.

• A WAV file that can be loaded must be allocated in the root directory on the backup disk.

A WAV file moved from the root directory to another area such as a folder cannot be recognized by the

VF80, which may cause a malfunction.

About file names of WAV files

• A WAV file the VF80 saves is recorded with a file name "******##.WAV".

• A WAV file the VF80 can load must have a file name "******##.WAV".

The first 6 characters "******" are the title that is shown in the "Title Edit" screen in the setup mode.

These characters can be changed when saving using a WAV file or edited by a computer.

The following 2 characters "##" indicate the track number (1 to 24) for the save/load using a WAV file.

The last ". WAV" is the file extension indicating that the file format is WAV.

The VF80 does not recognize other file names than above. See the following description for each

operation about details.

By using the specifications above, you can load only the desired tracks of a WAV file or load a track-

swapped WAV file. See "Loading a WAV file" described later for details.

You can save a WAV file. The following procedure assumes that the newly CD-RW/CD-R disk is used for

backup.

Flashing

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup

menu.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Save PGM" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

to which the data is saved. "IDE" flashes.

While "IDE" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the backup

mode (FDMS 3 or WAV), where "WAV" flashes.

While "WAV" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting On or Off

of the Edit Source Export function, where "Off" flashes.

You can switches between On and Off by using the

[CURSOR] keys .

If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END" (in

most cases), you do not have to change the setting

here.

The Edit Source Export function allows you to save

the desired range of data between the Start and

End points which are set when executing the Copy-

paste or Move-paste function.

Therefore, if you want to save only the specific range

of data, you have to register the Start and End points

before the save operation.

See "Track Editing" in "Recorder Function" for

details about how to set the Start and End points.

110

Save/Load of Song data

Flashing

7After selecting the track(s), press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a WAV file

on the disk.

If no file is recorded on the disk, "WAV" and "Sure?"

flashes. You can select "Eject" by rotating the [JOG]

dial. To remove the disk, select "Eject" and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

<Hints>

If the backup disk contains any existing program(s)

previously saved, the display may show following

screens after carrying out the previous step, depending

on the available space of the backup disk.

•Showing the title and "New File":

There is enough space for creating a new WAV file in

addition to the existing WAV files on the disk.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key advances to the next step

(for editing the file name).

After completing the save operation, this new WAV file

will be added on the disk.

•Showing the title and "New File", and "-****MB"

alternately:

The space for adding a new WAV file to the existing

WAV files on the disk is ****MB short.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key shows "Disk Full!",

followed by "Delete All WAV?".

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again deletes all the WAV

file on the disk and advances to the next step (for

editing the file name)

After completing the save operation, only this new WAV

file will remain on the disk.

•Showing the title and "****MB":

To get enough space for creating a WAV file, the

specified file on the backup disk will be deleted.

By pressing the [ENTER/YES] key, "DEL" appears.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again will delete the

specified WAV file on the disk and advances to the

next step (for editing the file name).

After completing the save operation, the specified WAV

file will be replaced with the new WAV file on the disk.

Flashing

While "Off" is blinking, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a program

to be saved. The program number currently selected

flashes, while the data size of the program is shown.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a program to be saved

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a track to

be saved. Initially, "All Track" flashes.

By rotating the [JOG] dial (or press the [CURSOR] </>

key), you can select "From ** To **" (where the left field

flashes initially) instead of "All Track".

If you save data for all tracks (1 through 24), select

"All Track". If you save data for any specific track(s),

select "From ** To **" and specify the desired track

numbers.

By rotating the [JOG] dial while the left ("From") field

is flashing, you can select the track number from 01

through 24. The number in the right ("To") field

automatically follows the number in the left field (i.e.

numbers in the left and right fields are always the same).

Therefore, if you want to save a single track, you just

have to set the right ("From") field and do not have to

set the right ("To") field. For example, "From 02 To 02"

will save only track 2.

To specify tracks 5 through 12:

•Enter "05" to the left field while the left field is

flashing.

•Press the [CURSOR </>] key to make the right field

flashing.

•Enter "12". (Note that the number for the right field

must be equal to or larger than the left field.)

Finally the screen shows "From 05 to 12" to save tracks

5 through 12.

<Note>

If you save all data from "ABS 0" to "REC END", make

sure to set the Edit Source Export function to Off.

Flashing

111

Save/Load of Song data

•Showing the title and "-****MB":

Even if the specified file is deleted, the space for

creating a new WAV file on the disk is ****MB short.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key shows "Disk Full!",

followed by "Delete All WAV?".

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key again deletes all the WAV

file on the disk and advances to the next step (for

editing the file name).

After completing the save operation, only the new WAV

file will remain on the disk.

After selecting a file, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for editing the WAV file.

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can set the desired

numeric, symbolic or alphabetical character to the

blinking point. You can move the blinking point by

using the [CURSOR] keys.

See the following table for the available characters.

Upper-case alphabetical characters (A to Z)

Numerals (0 to 9)

Symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ -)

<Note>

You can use up to 6 characters for a file name.

Some characters entered are converted as shown

below.

• Upper-case alphabetical characters (A to Z): not

converted

• Lower-case alphabetical characters (a to z):

converted to the corresponding upper-case

• Numerals (0 to 9): not converted

• Symbols (! # $ % & ' ( ) @ ^ _ -): not converted

• Other symbols: converted to "_".

After entering the file name, press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

The save operation is executed and the display shows

something like the one as below. As the file save goes

on, the remaining data size shown on the screen counts

down.

When saving data onto more than one disk, the current

disk number is shown on the screen as "Disk *" (where

* indicates the number).

Immediately after the data save to each disk is

completed, the disk is automatically ejected, and "Insert

Disk *" blinks on the screen, prompting you to insert

the next disk.

Inserting the next disk resumes the save operation.

After the save operation is completed, "Save

Completed!" appears on the screen.

<Hint>

In the save operation which requires more than

one backup disk, if you use a backup disk which

contains any program(s) saved, the display shows

the screen as shown below.

This screen is asking you weather to delete all

existing WAV files on the disk or to eject the disk.

To delete all the existing files, select "All Delete" and

press the [ENTER/YES] key. All existing files are

deleted and the disk is ready for saving data.

If you do not want to delete the existing files, select

"Eject" and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The disk is ejected so you can insert another disk.

To select between "All Delete" and "Eject", press the

[CURSOR] key.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key)

repeatedly until exiting the setup mode.

112

Save/Load of Song data

###### 01. WAV ###### 02. WAV ###### 24. WAV

•WAV file structure

A WAV file on the backup disk has 24 files (one file

per track) in the root directory of the disk.

The file names are "******01.WAV" through

"******24.WAV" where "******" shows the file name

specified in step 8 above and each number (01 - 24)

shows the corresponding track number.

If a track has no data recorded, the corresponding file

with no data is created.

•WAV file structure which is saved over more than

one disk

A WAV file is saved in order of track number (from

tracks 1 to 24).

During the save operation over more than one backup

disk, the VF80 always calculates the available space

of the disk automatically. If the VF80 knows that the

available space gets smaller than the data size of the

next track, it will change the disk when the data save

of the current track is completed.

•WAV file size

When saving data by the WAV file format to a backup

disk, the file size may sometimes increase compared

with the data size in the current drive, depending on

the recorded data condition such as the start time,

end time, the data amount, etc. on each track.

For example, if a track is recorded from ABS:0 (min.)

to ABS:1 (min.) and ABS:10 (min.) to ABS 11 (min.),

the file on the current drive has a length of 2 minutes,

while the WAV file has a length of 11 minutes.

Also as mentioned above, if a track has no data

recorded, the corresponding WAV file with no data is

created though the size is small.

<Notes>

• If the file name you are going to save duplicates

with the existing WAV file name on the backup disk,

"Warning! Already Exist" is shown on the screen and

the save operation will not be executed.

In such a case, change the file name according to

the procedure above and carry out the save

operation again.

• A disk on which you have overwritten data many

times may lower the access speed because of the

disk fragmentation. Therefore, we suggest that you

should use a newly formatted "clean" disk for

backup.

• If any other file but "******##.WAV" or folder, which

cannot be recognized by the VF80, is created on the

backup disk using a personal computer, the VF80

cannot calculate the available backup disk space

accurately. Accordingly, it may happen that the save

operation cannot be completed. You should note this

when changing the file name or creating a folder

using your computer.

113

Save/Load of Song data

Loading a WAV file

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the setup mode.

The display shows the screen for selecting the Setup

menu.

Use the [JOG] dial to select "Load PGM" and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

from which the data is loaded. "IDE" flashes.

While "IDE" is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the drive name, followed by the

screen for selecting the WAV file to be loaded, showing

the WAV file name and size.

If no disk is inserted, "No SCSI Disk!" is shown.

Use the [JOG] dial to select the desired WAV file to

be loaded.

If more than one WAV file with different file names

(the first 6 characters) is saved, you can see each file

name (by the first 6 characters) in order when rotating

the [JOG] dial. You can also select "Eject" to remove

the backup disk.

<Note>

The VF80 cannot recognize any other file names

but "******##.WAV" and cannot load such disks. A

WAV file with an unique name (the first 6

characters) is recognized as an independent backup

file and can be selected.

After selecting the desired WAV file, press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting a track to

be loaded. "All" flashes initially.

Besides "All", you can select any one of tracks (01

through 24) by rotating the [JOG] dial (or press the

[CURSOR] </> key).

After selecting the desired track(s), press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the load

destination program to which a WAV file is loaded.

You can select the program by using the [JOG] dial.

When the screen shows "Title" and "Size", the selected

program will be deleted and replaced with the WAV

file loaded.

When the screen shows "Title" and "New PGM", the WAV

file loaded will create a new program.

<Note>

If the current drive does not have enough available

space for loading the WAV file, the size indication

on the screen shows a negative value ("-***").

In such a case, select a program that can be replaced

with the WAV file loaded without causing the disk

space shortage, or delete unnecessary programs by

the "Delete PGM" menu in the setup mode.

After selecting the load destination program, press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

When selecting a new program as the load destination

(by selecting an option showing "Title" and "New

PGM"), the load operation immediately starts.

When selecting an existing program as the load

destination (by selecting an option showing "Title" and

"Size"), "Overwrite?" and "Sure?" appear.

Pressing the [ENTER/YES] key will start the load

operation.

During the load operation, the screen shows something

like the one as below.

As the data load goes on, the remaining data size shown

on the screen counts down.

When the load operation is completed, "Load

Completed!" appears on the screen.

Flashing

<Note>

The title of the program to which the WAV file is

loaded is replaced with the WAV file name loaded

(the first 6 characters).

Flashing

114

Save/Load of Song data

****** 01. WAV ****** 12. WAV

Backup Disk 1

****** 13. WAV ****** 24. WAV

Backup Disk 2

<< Special loading method when using a computer >>

(*) Method to load specific tracks.

The backup disk in which files are saved will contain files from “******01.WAV” up to “******24.WAV.” Should these

files be deleted, moved from the root directory, for example, into a another folder or the file name changed which

cannot be acknowledged, this recorder will not recognize this file.

When a backup disk changed in this manner is loaded, only WAV files with file names “******##.WAV” which are

located in an acknowledgeable root directory can be loaded.

For example, if the “zero number of data” made at save is deleted from the backup disk and then load is executed,

only WAV files recorded with any other sound can be loaded.

(*) When loading WAV files saved in a multiple number of disks, they can be loaded by a special method

derived from the above method.

Assume that there is backup disc 1 saved with “******01.WAV” through “******12.WAV” and disc 2 saved with

“******13.WAV” through “******24.WAV.”

First, when backup disk 1 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 will be loaded. At this point, tracks 13-24 will not be loaded

and thus be non-recorded. Next, when backup disk 2 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 remains intact and tracks 13-24

only will be loaded.

< Note>

WAV files which can be saved/loaded by this recorder must have file names written as “******##.WAV.”

Other file names cannot be acknowledged by this recorder.

Unknown file names will not be acknowledged and could cause malfunction. Extreme care should be taken when

changing file names and making folders on a computer.

* The first six letters will be the title shown in the SETUP mode “Title Edit” display.

* The last two letters “##” represent each track number (1-24) of the WAV file which are to be saved/loaded.

* The last “WAV” is the extension which indicate that this is a WAV file.

* File name of the WAV file which is to be saved in the backup disk of this recorder will all be recorded in capital

letters. However, in certain computers, this WAV file name will be displayed in small letters.

(*) Method in loading by changing the track.

If the two letters “##” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to load them

on this recorder on a track different from that at the initial save. For example, if a WAV file named “ABCDEF01.WAV”

on track 1 is changed to “ABCDEF03.WAV” this WAV file will be loaded on track 3.

(*) Method in loading by changing the title.

If the 6 letters “******” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to load them

on this recorder under a title different from that at the first save. Letters which can be used at changing the file

name in a computer are those only indicated below. All of these letters must be one byte size.

Alphabets : A-Z and a-z

Numerals : 0-9

Symbols : !#$%&’()@‘_=

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] key) repeatedly

until exiting the setup mode.

To go back to the previous step or abort the operation,

you can also use the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] key.

115

Save/Load of Song data

Making an audio CD

The following procedure describes how to record mastered songs (using the internal mastering function) to a

CD-RW/CD-R disc to make an audio CD (CD-DA format).

The “Save PGM” menu in the Setup mode, which is used for saving song data, is also used for making an audio

CD.

When making an audio CD using the VF80, internal

mastering materials on the current drive are recorded

to a CD-RW/CD-R disc (by the CD-DA format).

You can record not only a single song but also mul-

tiple songs continuously.

When recording more that one songs continuously,

the VF80 automatically inserts a 2-second silent space

between songs.

VF80

CD-RW/CD-R disc

After turning on the power of the VF80, load a non-

recorded disc to the CD-RW drive.

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) the “Save PGM”

menu and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

to which the data is saved. “IDE” flashes.

<Note>

Key operations of the VF80 should be done after

completing access to a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “SCSI” flashes.

After showing the model name of the connected CD-

RW drive, the display shows the screen for selecting

the save mode, in which “BkUp” flashes.

To carry out making an audio CD, select “CD-DA”.

If you need to change the copy protection setting (the

default setting is “OFF”), select “Setup” (for setting

writing conditions). If you make an audio CD without

changing the copy protection setting, skip steps 5 and

6 below and go to step 7.

Flashing

Use the [JOG] dial (or the [CURSOR] / key) to

select “Setup” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the “CD-DA Setup” screen, on which

you can select the copy protection setting (see the next

page).

<Figure-1>

<Figure-2>

<Note>

If an audio CD is made using a CD-RW disc, it can be

played back only by a player that supports CD-RW

playback. You cannot playback such a disc by a con-

ventional CD player that does not support CD-RW play-

back.

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2 3 4 5 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

Silence (about 2 seconds)

Start point End point

123

Start point End point

Flashing

The following procedure assumes that there is a

program (song) mastered by the internal master-

ing function and the optional CD-RW drive (CD-

1A) is installed to the VF80.

116

Save/Load of Song data

To change the setting, press the [ENTER/YES] key when

the “CD-DA Setup” screen is shown.

The current setting starts flashing, showing it can be

edited. While flashing, use the [JOG] dial to select

“ON” or “OFF”, then press the [ENTER/YES] key to con-

firm.

Copy protection setting

You can restrict the disc copy (duplication) capa-

bility of an audio CD you are going to make.

While “CD-DA” is flashing, press the [ENTER/YES] key.

After showing “Please Wait!”, the display shows the

screen for selecting the program(s) to be record.

In the screen, a number such as “01” or “02” shows the

track number, while “NON” shows that no program is

assigned to the track.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a desired program and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected program is set to the first track.

After setting the copy protection, press the [EXIT/NO]

key.

The display returns to the screen for selecting the save

mode, in which “CD-DA” now flashes.

“ON” A disc you made can be copied to other digital

device once.

“OFF” A disc you made can be copied to other digital

device as many times as required (default).

<Note>

If the program time shows

“00: 00”

when selecting a pro-

gram as the screen example below, the

“Start”

and

“End”

points are not correctly set.

In other words, in the following conditions, the “Start”

and “End” points are not regarded as being correctly

set.

“Start point” = “End point”

“Start point” > “End point”

If you press the

[ENTER/YES]

key after selecting such a

program, the warning message as below appears on

the display and you cannot select the program.

“Void In!”, “Void Out!”, or “Void Data!”

<Note>

It is possible to select a program that is not inter-

nal mastering if it holds the correct

“Start”

and

“End”

points.

However, if you record such a program to a CD-

RW/CD-R disc with the audio CD format, only track

1 and 2 can be recorded.

So, make sure that you select programs properly

when making an audio CD.

• To record a single song to a CD-RW/CD-R disc,

select a program and press the [ENTER/YES] key,

and then go to step 10.

• To record more than one song to a CD-RW/CD-R

disc, repeat the procedure for selecting a program

described above (i.e. use the [JOG] dial to select a

program and press the [ENTER/YES] key) until

selecting all desired programs, and then go to step

10.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key again.

The display shows the screen in which the last pro-

gram number of the current drive flashes.

Its program title and recording time are also shown,

while the total time of songs is shown at the top of the

screen.

Data between the "Start point" and "End point" is trans-

ferred to an audio CD.

Before executing recording, we recommend you to con-

firm that the actual audio in the program starts just

after the "Start point" and ends just before "End point".

Flashing

117

Save/Load of Song data

<Hint>

When a CD-RW disc on which any data is recorded

is set, if you perform step 7 above (i.e. pressing the

[ENTER/YES] key when “CD-DA” is flashing), “Not

Empty!” appears on the display, followed by the

screen for selecting whether erasing recorded data

or ejecting the disc.

• If you erase recorded data:

Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “ERASE” and

“Sure?” are flashing.

After the key press, the display changes as follows

and the VF80 starts erasing the data.

As the erasing process is going on, the number of

flashing “ * ” increases.

When erasing is completed, the display shows the

same screen which appears when pressing the [EN-

TER/YES] key after selecting “CD-DA” on step 7 above.

So follow the same procedure from step 8 on page

116.

Increases as the process progresses.

• If you eject the disc:

Use the [JOG] dial to make “Eject” flashing and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The disc is ejected, while “Insert Disk!” appears on

the screen.

When inserting a blank disc, you can go on the next

step (see the procedure described above).

When the recording ends, “Save Completed!” appears

on the screen, while the disc is automatically ejected

from the CD-RW drive.

When completed, press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit the

Setup mode.

Flashing

Flashing Flashing

After specifying the program(s), press the [ENTER/

YES] key while holding down the [RECORD] key.

The VF80 starts recording to the disc, while the dis-

play shows the following screen.

<Note>

When making an audio CD, if you select a program

which consumes more disc space than the record-

able space of a CD-RW/CD-R disc,

“Disk Full!”

ap-

pears on the display and you cannot select the pro-

gram.

When recording more than one program to a CD-

RW/CD-R disc, do not skip any track when assign-

ing programs to tracks.

If you skip any track, you cannot record data to the

subsequent tracks. In the following example, track

03 is skipped when assigning programs.

So only tracks 01 and 02 will be recorded. Tracks

03 and subsequent tracks can not be recorded.

118

Save/Load of Song data

Loading from an audio CD

You can load a desired song to the VF80 from an audio CD you created by recording on a CD-RW/CD-R disc.

When a desired song is loaded, the VF80 automatically creates a new program on the current drive, and the

song are recorded on tracks 1 and 2 of the program. Loading data from an audio CD is operated via the

“Load PGM” menu in the Setup mode, which is the same way as loading backup data.

VF80

CD-RW/CD-R disc (or commercially available audio CD)

You can also load a material from a commercially available audio CD in the same manner, however, never use a

material for which a copyright is reserved for a commercial purpose.

Any unauthorized use will constitute infringement of such copyright and will render the infringer liable to an

action at low.

The following procedure assumes that the optional

CD-RW drive (CD-1A) is installed to the VF80 and

you have an audio CD you created (or available on

the market).

After turning on the power of the VF80, load a re-

corded audio CD disc to the CD-RW drive.

Press the [SETUP] key to enter the Setup mode.

Use the [JOG] dial to select (highlight) the “Load

PGM” menu and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display shows the screen for selecting the device

from which the data is loaded. “IDE” flashes.

<Note>

Do not carry out any VF80 key operation until the ac-

cess process to the CD-RW/CD-R disc is completed.

Flashing

Use the [JOG] dial (or [CURSOR] / key) to select

(highlight) “CD-DA”, then press the [ENTER/YES]

key.

A warning message for copyright appears.

You can scrolls the message to read all message by

rotating the [JOG] dial.

4. Press the [ENTER/YES] key while “IDE” flashes.

After showing the model name of the connected CD-

RW drive, the display shows the screen for selecting

the load mode, in which “BkUp” flashes.

To carry out loading a song from an audio CD, select

“CD-DA”.

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2 3 4 5 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS

RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

Flashing

119

Save/Load of Song data

Warning!

You are responsible for use of this digital de-

vice. Be sure to abide by the copyright condi-

tions of the source material.

Press “Enter/Yes” key if you agree with the

above.

If you agree to the message contents, press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

After showing “Set Enable!”, the display shows the

screen for selecting the song(s) to be loaded.

If there is more than one track recorded on the au-

dio CD, “ ” flashes, showing that you can select a

desired track. If there is only one track recorded on

the audio CD. “ ” is not shown on the screen.

Use the [JOG] dial to select a track number to be

loaded and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The destination program number starts flashing,

which is one greater than the highest program num-

ber among those available on the current drive.

This means a track is going to be loaded to a new

program.

For example, if there are 4 programs available on

the current drive, the destination program number(s)

on the current drive and then perform step 7 above

again. If there are already 99 programs on the cur-

rent drive, “Disk Full!” appears and no destination

program number is shown. In such a case, delete

the unnecessary program(s) on the current drive and

then perform step 7 above again.

To load more than one track, repeat steps 7 through

8 above.

The following screen example shows that tracks 1

and 2 will be loaded to program 05 and 06 respec-

tively. The track time is also shown to the left of

each program number.

<Hint>

The warning message above also appears when

setting the “Digital In setting” menu to “On”.

See “Setup mode” on page 130 for details.

Flashing

<Note>

When loading from a audio CD, no title is shown

when selecting the track.

<Note>

If you do not agree with the warning message con-

tents, press the

[EXIT/NO]

key to quit loading.

The display briefly shows

“Set Disable”

and “

Can’t

Loading”

, then returns to the mode select screen.

If you agree with the warning message contents,

go to the next step to continue the operation.

By rotating the [JOG] dial, you can select “NON”, as

well as a “Program”. When performing the load op-

eration, tracks that are set to “NON” are not loaded.

While the program number is flashing, press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The flashing program number changes to light sol-

idly, showing that the first track is ready to be loaded

to the program.

The warning message for copyright shown on the

screen is as follows.

120

Save/Load of Song data

After specifying track(s) to be loaded, press the

[ENTER/YES] key while holding down the [RECORD]

key.

The VF80 starts loading tracks to the current drive.

The following screen example shows that track 1 is

now being loaded to program 02 on the current drive.

When the loading ends, “Load Completed!” appears on

the screen, while the disc is automatically ejected from

the CD-RW drive.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key to quit the Setup mode.

The display returns to the Normal display that was

shown last time before entering the Setup mode.

<Hint>

If you are going to load tracks 1 and 3 in the ex-

ample above, instead of tracks 1 and 2, track 3 will

be loaded to program 06 (see the screen example

below).

However, if you select track 2 after selecting tracks

1 and 3, the VF80 automatically reassigns track 2

to program 06 and track 3 to program 07 (see the

screen example below).

121

SETUP mode

The SETUP mode of the VF80 offers the “Changing the initial settings” menus, which configure the operating

environment of the VF80, a “Check” menu that enables you to check the number of events for each track, and an

“Execution” menu that executes certain operations, such as save and load and disk formatting. The “Changing the

initial settings” menu include 15 parameters as shown in <Table-1> below. These parameters were set before the

VF80 was shipped from the factory and these values are called the “initial settings.” Modifying these settings allows

you to change the operating environment of the VF80. The “Check” menu provides two parameters “Checking the

number of events” as shown in <Table-2> - “Checking the number of events” and “Checking the current drive

information.”

Also, as shown in <Table-3>, the “Execution” menus include three items: Load PGM, Save PGM, and Disk Format,

which you can execute by selecting the corresponding SETUP menu. This chapter explains how to use the “Changing

the initial settings” menus shown in <Table-1> and the “Check” menu shown in <Table-2>.

For more information on the “Execution” menus, refer to the corresponding pages in the “Reference page” column

in <Table-3>.

<Table-3> “Execution” menu

Execution item Display Refer page Community

Saving song data to an external device Load PGM 96 -

Loading song data from an external device Save PGM 96 -

Formatting an current drive disk Disk Format 20 -

<Table-2> “Check” menu

Check item Display Refer page Community

Check of the event number on the track Number Of Event 131 -

Check of the current drive information Drive Information 132 -

<Table-1> “Changing the initial settings” menu

Parameters Display Default setting Refer page Community

Setting a time signature Signature Set 001BAR 4/4 122

Setting a tempo Tempo Set 001BAR 1 120 124

Setting the metronome function Click Off 125

Setting MIDI sync output signal Midi Sync Out MTC 126

Setting an MTC frame rate Frame Rate 25 frame 126

Setting an MTC offset value Mtc Offset 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf 127

Setting the offset mode Offset Mode ABS 127

Setting the slave mode Slave Mode Off 128

Setting the slave type Slave Type Vari 128

Setting the record protect function Rec Protect Off 129

Setting digital input Digital In Off 130

Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode Resolution Off 130

Setting the MIDI device ID number Device ID 00 131

Setting the fader fix mode Fader Fix Off 132

Setting the fader recall mode Fader Recall Off 133

: Modes applicable program by program. They can be saved/loaded.

: Modes applicable to all program. They cannot be saved/loaded.

122

SETUP mode

Time signature setting [“Signature Set”]

Select a program for which to set a time signature.

In the menu selecting display, select “Signature Set” and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display will change to confirming the currently set

signature. In the initial setting, the display will be as

shown below to indicate that the bar offset is -002BAR,

signature from the first bar is set to 4/4, and nothing is

set after the first bar.

If the [JOG] dial is rotated, items displayed can be

alternately selected. “-002BAR Offset” to setup the bar

offset figure, “Insert New Event” to setup a new signature

following the first bar, and “All Clear” to clear all signature/

tempo settings, can be selected.

To enter the SETUP mode

Entering the SETUP is possible only when the VF80 is in the Stop mode.

If the desired menu is selected via the [JOG] dial and the

[ENTER/YES] key pressed, you can proceed to the actual

setup procedure.

While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] key on

the operating panel.

When the [SETUP] key is pressed, the recorder enters the

SETUP mode first stage and change to the display for

selecting the SETUP menu. The white black reversed title

indicates the currently selected menu and the (flash)

indicates that other titles exist below.

<Note>

At shipping from the plant or when power is switched

on again, the “Signature Set” menu will be reversed in

white-black. Otherwise, when exiting from the SETUP

mode, the SETUP menu that was displayed last will be

reversed in black and white.

* To exit from the SETUP mode or return to the previous

level, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key).

* When selecting the desired SETUP menu, the

[CURSOR / ] keys can be used in addition to the

[JOG] dial.

• New Registering of Time Signature

While in the previous step 2 display, select “Insert

New Event” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The “Insert New Event” display section will change to

the display for setting up a new bar and the “002”

number will flash.

At this point, the bar figure displayed will be the bar

figure setup last +1 and the signature figure displayed

will be same as the last setting (Example: In the initial

state,“002BAR 4/4 ” will be shown.

Input the desired bar figure with the [JOG] dial and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will change to flashing of “4/4 .”

Input the desired meter via the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The input bar and signature figures will be set as shown

in the following. This display is an example of setting

the third bar to 3/4 beat. If the [JOG] dial is rotated,

the editing point of bar or signature, like the figures

shown below, can be input.

Using the “Setting a time signature” menu, you can set a time signature of a given measure on the internal

programmable Tempo Map. Also in this setting, the BAR (-002BAR, 1 , 00CLK) displayed at the head of the

disk in the time base BAR/BEAT/CLK can be set within a range of -009BAR ~ -002BAR.

For example, you can specify 4/4 for the first and second measures, and 2/2 from the third measure.”

Setting a time signature and tempo will create a Tempo Map, which allows the VF80 to manage a song using

the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. You can also use the Metronome function.

A time signature and tempo setting are required when MIDI clock & song position pointer are output to an

external sequencer.

* Initial Setting : 001bar 4/4 beat

* Available bars : 001 ~ 999

* Available time signature : 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8,

3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8, DEL

* Maximum setting points : 64

* The setting is applicable song by song.

* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data

* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.

* Make sure you choose the right program before setting this

mode.

flashing

123

SETUP mode

<Note>

You cannot register the “001BAR“ of “001BAR 4/4

.”

• Correcting the Registered Time Signature

Under the previous “Confirmation display,” select bar/

time signatures to be changed and press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

Input the desired signature via the [JOG] dial and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The newly input signature will be setup.

<Note>

Be careful because this procedure wipes out the tempo

setting as well as time signature setting.

Under the above “Confirmation display,” select “All

Clear” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

A following display of “All Clear,” “SURE ?” will flash.

This indicates the standby mode for clearing all

signature setting data and the tempo data.

• Clearing All Time Signature/Tempo Data

Under the above “Confirmation display,” select

“-002BAR Offset” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The “-002” display will change to flashing.

• Changing the Bar Offset Figure

Bar You can enter are from 001 to 999.

Time 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8

Signature or DEL

“DEL” is used to deleted time signature data.

The following bar numbers and time signatures can be

entered via the [JOG] dial.

Next, to register other bar and time signature, repeat

steps 2 through 5.

Upon completion of registering, press the [EXIT/NO]

key (or the [STOP] key) and exit from the SETUP mode.

• Deleting a Time Signature

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected measure/signature setting will be deleted.

After deleting, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key)

to exit from the SETUP mode.

<Note>

Take care because this procedure wipes out the tempo

setting as well as time signature setting.

Under the above “Confirmation display,” select bar/

time signatures to be deleted and press the [ENTER/

YES] key.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key again to make “ */* ” to

flash and input “DEL” via the [JOG] dial.

Press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Except for the initial setting “001BAR 4/4 ,” other time

signature settings and the tempo setting will be cleared

at the same time.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

Input the desired offset value with the [JOG] dial and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Offset value can be input in the -2 through -9 range.

After correction, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP]

key) to exit from the SETUP mode.

flashing

Upon finishing, press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP]

key) to exit from the SETUP mode.

Time 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8

Signature or DEL

“DEL” is used to deleted time signature data.

124

SETUP mode

Tempo Map

Time signature setting Tempo setting

001 BAR 4/4

005 BAR 3/4

001 BAR 1 = 120

003 BAR 1 = 90

005 BAR 3 = 60

007 BAR 2 = 120

Tempo = 120 Tempo = 90

Tempo = 60 Tempo = 120

Input the desired bar with the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The bar value that can be input is identical with the

above “signature setup.” When the [ENTER/YES] key is

pressed, “beat value” will change to flashing.

Input the desired beat with the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The meter value that can be input is identical with the

above “signature setup.” When the [ENTER/YES] key is

pressed, “tempo value” will change to flashing.

Input the desired tempo with the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The tempo can be input within the range of 30 through

250. When the [ENTER/YES] key is pressed, the tempo

map value thus input will be set and return to the

above mentioned “Confirmation display for tempo

map.”

To register another tempo map, repeat steps 1 through

Upon completing registering, press the [EXIT/NO] key

(or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode.

For a setup example, if it is attempted to setup the

following tempo in the music that is set to [001BAR 4/

4 ] and [005BAR 3/4 ] by the previous “signature

setup,” as seen in the music score below, the tempo

Setting a tempo [“Tempo Set”]

• New Registering of Tempo

<Note>

The tempo set figure setup here is an approximate figure and thus not accurate. Therefore, although the tempo map be

matched with a personal computer, they will gradually drift apart. In order to prevent this drift, the personal computer

side can be set to either MIDI clock sync or, the MIDI sync output signal temporarily set to “MIDI Clock” the figure reset

to make it possible for the computer to read the accurate tempo, and the return it again to MTC sync.

The “Tempo Map Set” menu enables you to specify a tempo at a given point in a song that already has a time

signature setting. For example, you can specify a tempo of 150 to the third beat of the 12th measure.

Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map, which is used by the VF80 to manage the song using the

BAR/BEAT/CLK time base, and enable the metronome function. Tempo settings as well as time signature settings

are required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer to an external sequencer.

Under the above “Confirmation display,” select “Insert

New Event” and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The “Insert New Event” section will change to new tempo

setup display and “002” will flash. The bar value thus

displayed will be the last setup bar value +1 and tempo

value will be identical with the last setting (Example:

In the initial setup state, “002BAR 1 =120” will be

displayed.

Select a program for which to set a tempo setting.

Under the menu selection display, select “Tempo Set”

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The display will change, confirming the current tempo

setting. At the initial setting, the display will be as

shown below, indicating that tempo of the first beat

for the 001 bar is 120 and subsequent tempo is not

setup. “Insert New Event” should be selected at setup

of a new tempo. When the [JOG] dial is rotated, the

currently displayed items can be selected alternately.

* Initial Setting: 001BAR 1st beat 120 bpm

* Bar to register: Follows to the time signature setting

* Beat to register: Follows to the time signature setting

* Available tempo: 30 ~ 250, DEL (delete)

* Maximum setting points:64

* The setting is applicable song by song.

* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the

song data

* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.

* Make sure you choose the right program before setting

this mode.

flashing

125

SETUP mode

• Erasing of the Registered Tempo

Setting the Metronome function [“Click”]

<Note>

Metronome sound will be output from track 6.

For this reason, when the metronome function is activated, a new sound source cannot be recorded on the

track to which the metronome sound is to be output or sound recorded on this track cannot be played back.

If the metronome function is not to be used, be sure to reset it to “Off.”

Select “Click” in the menu selection display and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set item (Off or On) will flash (“Off” will

flash if in the initial state).

Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected item will be setup.

“Setting the Metronome function” menu allows you to determine whether or not the VF80 outputs a metronome

sound from track 6 during playback or recording. Turning the Metronome function on enables you to record your

performance while playing the instrument accompanying the metronome sound.

• Correction of the Registered Tempo

Under the above “Confirmation display,” select the

tempo map which is to be changed and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The same as before, “tempo value” will flash.

Input the desired tempo with the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

Upon completing registering, press the [EXIT/NO] key

(or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode.

Under the above “Confirmation display,” select the

tempo map which is to be erased and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

The same as before, “tempo value” will flash.

On Metronome sound will be output from

track 6.

Off (default) Metronome sound will not be output.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

Upon completing registering, press the [EXIT/NO] key

(or [STOP] key) to exit from the SETUP mode.

* Initial Setting : [Off]

* Available setting : [Off] or [On]

* The setting is applicable song by song.

* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data

* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.

* Make sure you choose the right program before setting this

mode.

<Note>

You cannot register the “001BAR 1

=120.”

flashing

Input the “DEL” with the [CURSOR ] key, and then

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected tempo map will be erased.

126

SETUP mode

Select the desired MIDI sync signal with the [JOG]

dial and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Setting MIDI sync output signal [“Midi Sync Out”]

Select “Midi Sync Out” in the menu selection display

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set item will flash. “CLK” will flash in

initial setting.

CLK (Initial setting) MIDI clock and song position

pointer will be output.

Mtc MIDI time code will be output.

Off Any MIDI sync signal will not

be output.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

The “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu enables you to select the type of MIDI sync signals output from

the MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel of the VF80 to an external MIDI device.

The options are MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, or MTC (MIDI time code). Select an appropriate option

depending on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI device.

If you select MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, first you need to set the time signatures and tempo as

described previously. If you select MTC, you first need to set the MTC frame rate, the MTC offset time, and the

MTC offset mode as described later.

• Initial setting: [Mtc]

• Option: [CLK] (clock & Song Position Pointer),

[MTC] (MIDI time code), or [Off] (no

output)

* You can set the parameters for each Program

individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

flashing

Setting an MTC frame rate [“Frame Rate”]

<Note>

There are no 29.97nd or 29.97df in the MTC standard.

Use either 30nd or 30df unless you definitely need to

synchronize the VF80 with NTSC video.

Select “Frame Rate” in the menu selection display and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set frame rate will flashes. “25” will flash

in the initial setting.

Select the desired frame rate value with the [JOG]

dial and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will be set to the selected frame rate.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

The “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu enables you to set the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT

connector of the VF80 to an external MIDI device. If you have already set the type of MIDI sync output signal

to [MTC], you need to set the frame rate. Use the frame rate of MTC received by the external MIDI device (or

sequence software).

• Initial setting: [25] (25 frames)

• Setting range of frame rate: [24], [25], [29df],

[29nd], [30df] or [30nd]

* You can set the value for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

flashing

127

SETUP mode

Setting MTC Offset mode [“Offset Mode”]

Select “Offset Mode” in the menu selection display

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set offset mode will flash. “ABS” will

flash in the initial setting.

If you have selected [MTC] in the “Setting Offset mode” menu, you need to select MTC Offset mode.

This menu enables you to determine whether the specified MTC is output at ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f or at

001bar 1beat 00clk (bar/beat) of the Tempo Map.

<Notes>

* As an example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS” and you wish to start the song from MTC’s 1h 00m 00s 00f, you

may want to set a preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s 00f.

If you select “Bar “ as the MTC Offset mode, a preroll of two measures is automatically set. Use 01h 00m 00s 00f; do

not set a preroll value.

* If you set Offset mode to “Bar “ and use MTC to synchronize sequence software on the computer, the tempo of the

sequencer may sometimes slip gradually. This is because the tempo of the VF80 and the tempo of the software are

slightly different even if both use the same tempo. Some sequence software can read the tempo output from the VF80

correctly. We recommend that you use the tempo of the VF80 on the sequence software. No such problems will

occur if the sequence software synchronizes the VF80 via MIDI clock, instead of MTC.

• Initial setting: [ABS]

• Offset mode option: [ABS] or [Bar ]

* You can set the mode for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

Setting an MTC offset value [“Mtc Offset Set”]

Select “Mtc Offset Set” in the menu selection display

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will change to the second level display of the [Mtc

Offset] menu and the currently set offset value will be

shown.

00h 59m 00f 00sf will be displayed in the initial state

and “s” will flash. Flashing indicates the editable point.

Move the edit point with the [CURSOR] key, input the

desired offset with the [JOG] dial, then press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

Offset value thus input will be set.

Advancing or retarding the input figure is carried out

automatically with reference to the currently set MTC

frame rate figure.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

The “Setting an MTC offset value” menu enables you to specify an offset time value - the difference between

the time of MTC output from the VF80 and the ABS 00m 00s 00f 00sf time. You need to specify this value if

you have selected [MTC] for the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu.

With the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf, for example, MTC of 59m 57s 00f 00sf is output at the ABS

time 00m 00s 00f 00sf. You can also set an offset value from the 001bar 1beat 00clk value (bar/beat) on the

Tempo Map. Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset mode.

• Initial setting: [00h: 59m: 57s: 00f: 00sf]

• Setting range of offset time: 00h: 00m: 00s: 00f: 00sf

~ 23h: 59m: 59s: 29f: 99sf

* You can set the value for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

<Note>

For example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS” (See the

next section) and you wish to start the song from MTC’s

01h 00m 00s 00f, you may wish to set a preroll of three

seconds with an MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s 00f.

flashing

128

SETUP mode

Select the desired offset mode with the [JOG] dial

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected offset mode will be set.

Setting the Slave mode [“Slave Mode”]

This mode allows you to choose the VF80 slave mode setting either On or Off.

If you set the slave mode to “On”, the VF80 will synchronize to the incoming MTC (MIDI Time Code) from

master unit. It will also synchronize to a type of external sync signal which you have chosen with the section

“Slave Type setting.”

Select “Slave Mode” in the menu selection display and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set slave mode will flash. “Off” will flash

in the initial setting.

Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

Upon exit from the SETUP mode, the “SLAVE” icon

will flash.

This icon will change to constant lighting when VF80

is correctly synchronized with the external equipment.

[ABS] (Initial setting) The specified MTC offset time is

output at ABS 00h 00m 00s 00f.

[BAR ] The specified MTC offset time is

output at 001bar 1beat 00clk of

the Tempo Map.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Slave mode option: [On] or [Off]

* You can set the mode for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

flashing

Setting the Slave Type [“Slave Type”]

If you have set Slave Mode to “On” in the previous section “Slave Mode Setting,” you can choose what type of

external sync signal that the VF80 synchronizes to. This mode allows you to choose the external sync signal type.

<Notes>

* You need to input MTC from an external device to the

VF80 with any Slave Type.

* The VF80 re-chase window is fixed to ten frames. That

is, if an offset between the master device and slave device

exceeds ten frames, the VF80 interprets that as out of

sync, and tried to chase and lock to MTC sent from the

master device. This operation is called “re-chasing.”

During the re-chase operation, audio output is muted.

If the slave machine slips with MTC from the master

device by less than ten frames, the slave machine

continues running while recognizing the slippage.

* When you set the Slave Type, the Vari Pitch function is

automatically disabled. (The “VARI PITCH” indicator

turns off.)

• Initial setting: [Vari]

• Slave type option: [Vari], [Free] or [SPDIF]

* You can set the mode for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

2 3

129

SETUP mode

Setting the Record Protect function [“Rec Protect”]

The “Setting the Record Protect function” menu allows you to turn the Record Protection function On or Off.

When this function in turned “On”, you cannot record, paste, or erase data. Use this function to protect your

important data from being accidentally erased.

Select the desired slave type with the [JOG] dial and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will be set to the selected slave type.

Select “Slave Type” in the menu selection display and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set slave type will flash. “Vari” will be

flash in the initial setting.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

Select “Rec Protect” in the menu selection display

and then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The presently set item (On or Off) will flash.

“Off” will flash in the initial setting.

Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and then press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will be set to the selected item (On or Off).

Selecting “Off” enables recording; you can record,

paste, and erase data.

Selecting “On” disables recording; and you cannot

record, paste, or erase data.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Options: [On] or [Off]

* You can set the mode for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

This is the mode whereby after chase

locking, it will free run by the internal

clock of VF80 or the digital in clock

from the external equipment should

the time drift away from that of the

master.

This is the mode whereby after chase

locking, it will constantly run by vari-

pitch so that the time does not drift

away from that of the master by

compensating the phase drift.

However, if digital in has been set, it

will operate the same as for “Free.”

This is the mode whereby after chase

locking, it will free run by the S/P DIF

clock only when there is S/P DIF digital

signals from the master.

However, if digital in has been set, that

clock will have priority.

<Note>

When recording is disabled (“On”) and you try to record,

paste, or erase data, the VF80 displays “Protected!” for a

second, indicating that you cannot perform the operation.

To perform the operation you need to enable recording

(“Off”).

flashing

Free

Vari

(Initial setting)

SPDIF

130

SETUP mode

Setting Digital Input [“Digital In”]

In the [Setting digital input] menu, whether the signal assigned to tracks 7 and 8 are S/P DIF digital signal

analog signals, can be setup. By using this function, it becomes possible to digitally record from external

digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT, adat, digital mixer, etc.).

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Options: [On] or [Off]

* You can set the mode for each Program individually.

* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of

the song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

Setting BAR/BEAT Resolution mode [“Resolution”]

For example, assume that you have stored the value for

001bar 1 46 clk as the START point, and the value for

002bar 4 51 clk as the END point.

These values will be used as they are if BAR/BEAT

resolution mode is turned off. However, the mode is

turned on, the following values will be stored instead.

The following example has a time signature setting of 4/

001 bar 1 46 clk -> 001 bar 1 00 clk

(A clk value of 46 will be rounded off.)

002 bar 4 51 clk -> 003 bar 1 00 clk

(A clk value of 51 will be rounded up.)

The “Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode” menu enables you to turn BAR/BEAT resolution mode on and off.

The initial setting is “Off.” When you turn this mode “On”, the CLK (clock) digits will be always round off to “00”

and be stored in the memory key while the VF80 is using the BAR/BEAT/CLK time base.

That is, beat-resolution is used. Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat-resolution value of the

IN/OUT points, START/END points and END point in real-time. Therefore, it is very convenient when you perform

the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste operation in beat-resolution.

Select “Resolution” in the menu selection display and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The presently set item will be flash (On or Off).

“Off” will flash in the initial setup.

Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and press the

[ENTER/YES] key.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Options: [On] or [Off]

* You can set the mode for each Program individually.

* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of

the song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

flashing

Select “Digital In” in the menu selection display and

then press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The presently set item (On or Off) will flash.

“Off” will flash in the initial setting.

flashing

Select “On” or “Off” with the [JOG] dial and then press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will be set to the selected item (On or Off).

When selecting “On” and pressing the [ENTER/YES]

key, “Warning” message appears.

<Note>

When setting “Digital In” to “On”, “DIGI IN” appears on

the Normal screen. While the VF80 receives a valid S/P

DIF digital signal from an external digital device and is

locked to it, “DIGI IN” steadily lights. While the VF80 does

not receive a valid S/P DIF signal, “DIGI IN” blinks.

If “DIGI IN” blinks when sending an S/P DIF signal from

the external device, check the connection between the VF80

and the external device, as well as the settings (for the

digital output, etc) of the external device.

<Note>

When “Digital In” is set to “On”, if you enter the bounce,

training or mastering mode, the “Digital In” setting is

automatically changes to “Off.” Therefore, to perform the

digital recording after exiting the move above, you must

set “Digital In” to “On” again.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

You can scroll the message by rotating the [JOG] dial.

If you agree to the message, press the [ENTER/YES] key

again. If you do not agree to the message, press the

[EXIT/NO] key to stop setting.

131

SETUP mode

Select desired device number with the [JOG] dial and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or STOP key) to exit from

the SETUP mode.

Setting the MIDI device number [“Device ID”]

The “Setting the MIDI device number” menu enables you to set the VF80 device ID number required to control the

VF80 from a sequence software using MMC (MIDI Machine Control).

The transmit device ID links to this setting. You can set the device ID from 00 to 99.

However, if the device ID number of the message the VF80 receives is [7F], the VF80 will recognizes it to perform the

corresponding operation, regardless of its device ID setting.

• Initial setting: [00]

• Options: [00] ~ [99]

* You can set the mode for each Program individually.

* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of

the song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

Select “Device ID” in the menu selection display and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The presently device number will be flash.

“00” will flash in the initial setup.

flashing

Checking the number of track events [“Number Of Event”]

Select “Number of Event” in the menu a selection display

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will change to the "Event" second level and the

event number currently in each track will be dis-

played (The * symbol indicates there is data below).

*** is the event number.

Use the [JOG] dial to select another (01~24) to check

the number of events on the corresponding track.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

SETUP mode.

The “Checking the number of track events” menu enables you to check the number of events on each track.

Each track (including Additional tracks) of VF80 Programs consists of consecutive audio files (and “zero”

files). The number of events represents the total number of audio files and 0 files. Each track can contain up

to 512 events.

If you are editing a song of typical length (about six minutes), repeated editing operation does not usually

exceed this maximum number. (Exceeding this limit is called “event number overflow.”) Even a 20-minute

song will not cause event number overflow. This is because the recorder system always optimizes the data

structure by keeping the number of events low. However, if a recording on a track is scattered in different

areas of the disk, or if you have made a very long recording on a single track and performed many edits, you

should be wary of “event number overflow.” To avoid this problem, use the “Checking the number of track

events” menu to check the number of events on each track prior to recording or editing.

132

SETUP mode

Select the desired item with the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected item will be set.

Fader Fix Mode Setting [“Fader Fix”]

Whether the fader manipulation should be reflected on the sound volume or not can be set.

The setup content will be held even if the main power is switched off.

Select “Fader Fix” in the menu selection display and

press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the initial

setting.

On For all modes, manipulation of the

Track fader/Master fader will

have not affect on the sound volume.

Any accidental shifting of the fader

position by vibration and

misoperation can be prevented.

Off (Initial setting) Manipulation of the Track fader/

Master fader will affect the sound

volume.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

SETUP mode.

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Options: [On] or [Off]

* You can set the value for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

flashing

The “Fader Fix Mode” can be made to function when set

in other (Track, Master or Trk & Mst) than “Off” of the

next item on the “Fader Recall Mode”.

The Drive Format Information [“Drive Information”]

Select “Drive Information” in the menu selection display

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

It will change to the "Drive Information" second level

and the current drive information currently in use

will be displayed (The symbol indicates there is data

below).

As the [JOG] dial is rotated, information will be displayed

one by one.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

SETUP mode.

Format information of the current drive currently installed can be checked by using the “Drive Format

Information” menu. Should any trouble occur in the VF80, providing the information obtained here to our

nearest Fostex Service Station will be of great help in giving quick service.

The following items will be displayed and can be confirmed.

1. Manufacture / Model of the currently installed hard

disk.

2. Format method

3. Format type

4. Simultaneously recordable number of tracks

5. Number of bits at formatting

6. Sampling frequency at formatting

7. Present number of programs

8. Present number of free blocks

9. Audio file / maximum number of events and its

program No.

10. Specific capacity of the drive

11. Remaining capacity of the drive

12. Present software version

133

SETUP mode

Input the desired item with the [JOG] dial and press

the [ENTER/YES] key.

The selected item will be set.

Fader Recall Mode Setting [“Fader Recall”]

In the "Setup of the fader recall mode" menu, whether each track fader/master fader settings should be

recalled or not at scene recall, can be setup.

Select “Fader Recall” in the menu a selection display

and press the [ENTER/YES] key.

The currently set will flash. “Off” will flash in the

initial setting.

Off When scene is recalled, the fader

(Initial setting) position immediately prior to

recalling the scene will be directly

employed without recalling the

setup figures of each track fader and

the master fader.

Track When scene is recalled, setup figures

of each track faders only will be

recalled and not recall the master

fader setup figure.

Master When scene is recalled, the setup

figure of the master fader only is

recalled and the track fader setup

figures will not be recalled.

Trk & Mst When scene is recalled, each track

faders and the master fader set up

figures will both be recalled.

Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] key) to exit from the

SETUP mode.

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Options: [Off], [Track], [Master] or [Trk & Mst]

* You can set the value for each Program individually.

* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the

song data.

* The settings are maintained after you turn off the

power to the VF80.

flashing

134

Appendix (Installing the optional CD-RW drive)

*a blank panel

*two screws for mounting the drive

*a CD-RW drive unit

Installing the CD-1A

With the CD-1A, you can use discs of following

types.

Recordable

ReWritable

<CD-R discs>

Can be used for saving or loading song

data, as well as making an audio CD.

Note that you can record data to a CD-

R disc only once. You cannot record

data to a disc which has been recorded

before.

<CD-RW discs>

Can be used for saving or loading song

data, as well as making an audio CD.

You can record or erase data to a CD-

R disc as many times as wish.

As these are read-only discs, you only

can use them for loading track data

to the VF80.

• When handling a disc, be careful not to dirty or

scratch the surface of the disc.

We recommend that you hold the disc with your

finger on the disc edge and center hole.

• Do not stick any paper, etc. on the label side.

Also do not scratch the label side, which may cause

problems during playback or recording. Use only a

felt pen or equivalent for writing any memo on the

label side. Using a ball-point pen, pencil, etc. that

has a hard tip may damage a disc.

• Never use a warped or chipped disc, which may

damage the CD-RW drive.

• If there is a dust, dirt or fingerprints on the disc, which

may cause error in playback or recording, wipe the

disc with a soft, dry cloth or alcohol from the center

out. Never wipe from the outside to center.

• Do not use a cleaner for analog discs or antistatic

spray, as well as volatile solvents such as benzine,

which may damage the disc surface.

• Do not expose any disc to direct sunlight, or leave it

in hot, moist or cold places.

• Read the attached manual packed with the disc be

fore using it.

The CD-1A package includes the drive and accessories shown below.

After purchasing the unit, check that all items are included. When installing the CD-1A to the VF80, the blank

panel and two screws are not used.

135

Appendix (Installing the optional CD-RW drive)

• The CD-RW drive is made of precision parts.

Do not apply a mechanical shock or use excessive force when installing it.

• Before installing the drive, make sure that the power of the VF80 is off and the power cord is

disconnected.

• Install the drive correctly according to this manual.

Note that damage to the drive caused by inappropriate installation is not covered by the

guarantee.

How to install the CD-1A

Remove the side cover of the VF80 by unfastening

the two screws using a screw driver.

After removing the cover, remove the blank panel

attached inside the cover.

Retain the cover which will be used later.

2Remove the metal fitting by unfastening the retain-

ing screw (indicated by an arrow) inside the CD-1A.

Because the screw head is small, use a micro screw

driver to carefully unfasten the screw without dam-

aging the head by excessive force.

3Insert the CD-1A unit to the VF80 as shown below.

Carefully insert the CD-1A to the VF80 in the right

direction, without rubbing it against the VF80 cabi-

net. Push the unit carefully and firmly with your

both hands, but without excessive force, until you

feel the connector of the CD-1A mesh with the inter-

nal connector.

4Using the screw (1 pc.) which tightened the blank

panel to VF80, fix CD-1A to the VF80 chassis.

Fasten the screws without excessive force.

Connect the power cable of the VF80 to an AC main

outlet, and turn on the power.

Check that the VF80 starts up and the indicator on

the front panel of the CD-1A flashes for a few sec-

onds and then turns off.

Do not operate the CD-1A unit the VF80 display

shows the Normal screen after showing the start-up

screen.

5Fix the cover removed in step 1.

Cover

Blank panel

CD-1A

Connector

Insert the CD-1A

136

Appendix (Installing the optional CD-RW drive)

• To open the tray, press the eject switch lightly.

Pressing the switch will open the tray slightly.

Then pull out the tray gently by hand to fully open it.

Opening/closing the tray

• To close the tray, push the tray inside by hand until locked.

<Caution!>

Do not touch the lens when pulling out

the tray, doing so may damage it and may

cause a malfunction.

<IMPORTANT!>

When placing a disc on the tray, support the tray from

the bottom by your hand. If you push the disc to fit

into the pivot on the tray without supporting the tray,

the tray/drive may be damaged or broken. Also note

that the disc must be pushed until it clicks so that it is

locked into the pivot securely. Closing the tray without

locking the disc may damage the disc.

• Place the disc with the label side up.

When placing the disc, support the tray from the bottom

by your hand as shown in the illustration below, and push

the disc gently until it clicks so that the disc is locked into

the pivot.

When removing a disc from the tray, also support the

tray from the bottom by your hand. Also be careful

not to unlock the disc from the pivot forcibly, which

may damage the tray.

Placing/removing a disc

The following are some notes on placing and/or re-

moving a disc.

<Caution!>

Do not touch the lens when placing a disc,

doing so may damaged may cause a mal-

function.

Lens

Push

Support the tray from the bottom.

Eject

137

Specifications

Basic

Channel

Function....................

Default

Changed

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Mode

Default

Message

Altered

Note

Number: True Voice

Velocity Note ON

Note OFF

After

Touch

Key’s

Channel’s

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Program

Change True #

System Exclusive

Common

System

Real Time

: Clock

: Commands

Aux.

Message

: Local ON/OFF

: All Notes OFF

: Reset

: Active Sense

Notes rem.1: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Identity reply

rem.2: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Inquiry

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

********************************

(rem. 1) (rem. 2)

(rem. 3)

X: No

: Yes

Version: V1.00

Date:

Model VF80 MIDI Implementation Chart

(Digital Multitracker)

: Tune

: Song Select

: Song Position

: Quarter Frame

rem.3: START, STOP, CONTINUE

138

Specifications

Command list Movement (Recorder)

01: STOP STOP

02: PLAY PLAY

03: DEFERRED PLAY DEFERRED PLAY

04: FAST FORWARD F FWD

05: REWIND REWIND

06: RECORD STROBE REC

07: RECORD EXIT PUNCH OUT

09: PAUSE STOP

40: WRITE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

41: MASKED WRITE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

42: READ Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

44: LOCATE LOCATE to Setting Data

46: SEARCH CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)

47: SHUTTLE CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)

4C: MOVE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

4D: ADD Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

4E: SUBTRACT Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

MMC Response/Information Field List Command

01: SELECTED TIME CODE READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

03: REQUESTED OFFSET READ/WRITE

04: ACTUAL OFFSET READ

08: GP 0 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

09: GP 1 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

0A: GP 2 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

0B: GP 3 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

0C: GP 4 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

0D: GP 5 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

0E: GP 6 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

0F: GP 7 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT

48: MOTION CONTROL TALLY READ

4C: RECORD MODE READ/WRITE

4E: TRACK RECORD STATUS READ

4F: TRACK RECORD READY READ/WRITE/MASKED WRITE

51: RECORD MONITOR READ/WRITE

IDENTITY REQUEST: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7

IDENTITY REPLY: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 13, 03, **, **, **, **, F7

51 :Fostex ID

01, 00 :Device family code

13, 03 :Device family number VF80

**, **, **, ** :Software version

MMC Command List

Inquiry Message List

139

Specifications

Maintenance

Specifications

Recording/Reproducing

Recording Medium : 3.5 inch, hard disk (E-IDE type)

Recording Format : FDMS-3 (*)

Save/Load Format : FDIO-1 (**)

Sampling Frequency : 44.1kHz

Quantization : 16-bit linear (Non expanded)

A/D Converter : 20-bit 64 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma

D/A Converter : 24-bit 128 times, over sampling, Delta-Sigma

No. of Recording Track : 8 real tracks + 16 additional tracks

*2 tracks for simultaneous recording (Maximum)

Vari Pitch Control : +/- 6%

Crossfade : 10msec.

Recording/Reproducing Frequency : 20Hz ~ 20kHz

Input/Output

Input A, B

Connector : ø6mm Phone jack (Unbalanced)

: XLR-3-31 type connector (Balanced)

Input Impedance : 50kΩ or more (Unbalanced)

:1kΩ or more (Balanced)

Standard Input Level : -50 ~ +4dBu

Phantom Power (XLR only) : +48VDC (Setting of ON/OFF with PHANTOM switch)

HEADPHONE

Connector : ø6mm TRS Phone jack

Load Impedance : 10Ω ~ 50Ω

Output Level : 20mW or more (at 32Ω)

STEREO OUT L, R

Connector : ø6mm Phone jack

Load Impedance : 10kΩ or more

Output Level : -10dBV

S/P DIF DIGITAL IN

Connector : COAXIAL

Format : IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)

DIGITAL OUT

Connector : COAXIAL

Format : IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)

MIDI IN/OUT

Connector : DIN 5 PIN

PUNCH IN/OUT

Connector : ø6mm Phone jack (An optional FOOT SW Model 8051

can be connected.)

Cleaning the exterior

* For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth.

For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off.

Then polish with a dry cloth. Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will

damage the printing and finish of the exterior.

140

Specifications

General

Dimensions : 307 (W) x 108 (H) x 217 (D) mm

Weight : Approx. 3.2kg

Power Supply : 120VAC 60Hz, 230V~ 50/60Hz (AC inlet type)

Power Consumption : 20W

Accessories

: Owner’s manual

: Power Cable

* Fostex Disk Management System-3

** Fostex Data In Out-1

Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement.

Block Diagram

TRK 1

2BAND EQ

MUTE GAIN

PAN

EFFECT

PRE/POST

TRK 2

2BAND EQ

MUTE GAIN

PAN

EFFECT

PRE/POST

TRK 3

2BAND EQ

MUTE GAIN

PAN

EFFECT

PRE/POST

TRK 4

2BAND EQ

MUTE GAIN

PAN

EFFECT

PRE/POST

TRK 5

2BAND EQ

MUTE GAIN

PAN

EFFECT

PRE/POST

TRK 6

2BAND EQ

MUTE GAIN

PAN

EFFECT

PRE/POST

BALANCE

GAIN

MUTE

MASTERING

EFFECT

TRK 7/8

2 TRK

MASTERING

MUTE GAIN

to METER

SEND LEVEL MUTE

ASP

EFFECT

PHONES

DA/C

ST OUT

DATA OUT

S/P DIF

ENCODE

AD/C

DECODE

AD/C

EFF

to METER

REP 1

REP 2

REP 3

REP 4

REP 5

REP 6

REP 7

REP 8

BOUNCE

REC 8

REC 7

REC 6

REC 5

REC 4

REC 3

REC 2

REC 1

PEAK

PHANTOM (+48V)

TRIM

PHANTOM (+48V)

TRIM

PEAK

S/P DIF

DATA IN

HDR

INPUT A

INPUT B

BOUNCE

OFF

EFFECT

RTN LEVEL

EFFECT

141

Specifications

DIGITAL MULTITRACKER

LOCATE ABS 0

LOCATE REC END

SEL

TIMEBASE

CURSOR

PHANTOM

ACCESS

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

GUITAR

LINE MIC LINE MIC MIN MAX

MASTERING TRAINING

EFFECTEQPAN

SCENE SEQ.SCENE

TRACK

UNDO

SETUP

PUNCH

AUTO LOOP PITCH SCRUB

VARI

F FWDREWINDPLAYSTOPRECORD

EXIT

ENTER

TRIMTRIM

WAVE FORM

MIX PARAMETER

PGM FADER MAP

ON/OFF

2TRK MODE

F1 F2 F3 SHIFT

EDIT EDIT EDIT MARK DELETE

LOCATE

FOOT SW

ST OUT

PHONES

INPUT A

BOUNCE

INPUT B

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

-10

-20

-40

∞

-30

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

2 3 4 5 6 7/8 2TRK1 MASTER

TRACK STATUS / TRACK SEL

TRACK STATUS RED REC GREEN PLAY OFF MUTE STATUS

/SEL

EJECT

/YES

/NO

SHUTTLE

JOG

UNBAL UNBAL

BAL

F1 F2 F3

EDIT

/REDO

REC EFF

OFF

MIDI

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

INPUT

POWER PHANTOM S/P DIF / DATA

307

108

217

Dimensions

AD/C

CH ON/OFF

TRIM

PHANTOM (+48V)

PEAK

REC EFF

REC 1

REC 2

REC 3

REC 4

REC 5

REC 6

REC 7

REC 8

PEAK

CH ON/OFF

REP 8

REP 7

REP 6

REP 5

REP 4

REP 3

REP 2

REP 1

to METER

TRK 1

MUTE

GAIN

PAN

2BAND EQ

TRK 2

MUTE

GAIN

PAN

2BAND EQ

TRK 3

MUTE

GAIN

PAN

2BAND EQ

TRK 4

MUTE

GAIN

PAN

2BAND EQ

TRK 5

MUTE

GAIN

PAN

2BAND EQ

TRK 6

MUTE

GAIN

PAN

2BAND EQ

TRK 7/8

MUTE GAIN BALANCE

MUTE GAIN

DA/C

PHONES LEVEL

PHONES

ST OUT

S/P DIF

DATA OUT

ENCODE

to METER

ON/OFF

OUT Level

INSERT

EFFECT

PHANTOM (+48V)

INPUT A

INPUT B

AD/C

TRIM

S/P DIF

DATA IN

DECODE

Normal

Effect Track

Block Diagram (when using the insert effect)

FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE

* Including non-EU countries (as of January, 2002).

<ITALY>

NAME: Proel S.p.A.

ADD: Zona Artigianale 64047-Sant’ Omero (Teramo), Italy

TEL: (+39) 0861-81241, FAX: (+39) 0861-887862

NAME: IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B. V.

ADD: Kuiperbergweg 20, 1101 AG Amsterdam, The

Netherlands

TEL: (+31) 20-697-2121, FAX: (+31) 20-697-4201

NAME: Siv. Ing. Benum A/S

ADD: P. O. Box 145 Vinderen, 0319 Oslo 3, Norway

TEL: (+47) 22-139900, FAX: (+47) 22-148259

NAME: Caius - Tecnologias Audio e Musica, Lda.

ADD: Rua de Santa Catarina, 131 4000 Porto, Portugal

TEL: (+351) 2-2086009/2001394

FAX: (+351) 2-2054760/2087488

<SPAIN>

NAME: Multitracker, S. A.

ADD: C/Garcilaso No.9, Madrid 28010, Spain

TEL: (+34) 91-4470700, 91-4470898, FAX: (+34) 91-5930716

NAME: TTS Scandinavia AB

ADD: Kavallerivagen 24, 172 48 Sundbyberg, Sweden

TEL: (+46) 8-59798000, FAX: (+46) 8-59798001

NAME: Audio Bauer Pro AG

ADD: Bernerstrasse-Nord 182, CH-8064 Zurich, Switzerland

TEL: (+41) 1-4323230, FAX: (+41) 1-4326558

<UK>

NAME: SCV London

ADD: 40 Chigwell Lane, Oakwood Hill Industrial Estate,

Loughton, Essex IG10 3NY U.K.

TEL: (+44) 020-8418-0778, FAX: (+44) 020-8418-0624

Declaration of EC Directive

This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member

nation's ordinance concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

- Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance concerning electric equipment designed to be used

within the specified voltage range.

The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment

The affect of the European Specification EN50082-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves - common

immunity specification) on this equipment are as shown below.

* In the electrical fast transient/burst requirements, surge, conducted disturbances by radio-frequency fields,

power frequency magnetic field, radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging

environment, this could be affected by generation of noise in some cases.

NAME: ATEC Audio-u. Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH.

ADD: Im Winkel 5, A-2325 Velm, Austria

TEL: (+43) 2234-74004, FAX: (+43) 2234-74074

NAME: EML Sound Industries NV

ADD: Bijvennestraat 1A, B3500 Hasselt, Belgium

TEL: (+32) 11-232355, FAX: (+32) 11-232172

NAME: SC Sound ApS

ADD: Malervej 2, DK-2630 Taastrup, Denmark

TEL: (+45) 4399-8877, FAX: (+45) 4399-8077

NAME: Noretron Oy Audio

ADD: P. O. Box 22, FIN-02631 Espoo, Finland

TEL: (+358) 9-5259330, FAX: (+358) 9-52593352

NAME: Guillard Musiques

ADD: ZAC de Folliouses, B. P. 609, Les Echets, 01706 Miribel,

France

TEL: (+33) 472 26 27 00, FAX: (+33) 472 26 27 01

NAME: Studiosound & Music GmbH

ADD: Industriestrasse 20, D-35041 Marburg, F. R. Germany

TEL: (+49) 6421-92510, FAX: (+49) 6421-925119

NAME: Bon Studio S. A.

ADD: 6 Zaimi Street, Exarchia, 106.83 Athens, Greece

TEL: (+30) 1-3809605-8, 3302059, FAX: (+30) 1-3845755

NAME: I. D. elrf. electronic Ltd.

ADD: ARMULA 38 108 REYKJAVIK, ICELAND

TEL: (+354) 588 5010, FAX: (+354) 588 5011

FOSTEX CORPORATION

3-2-35, Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo, Japan 196-0021

FOSTEX AMERICA

15431, Blackburn Ave., Norwalk, CA 90650, U. S. A.

356698

Fostex Vf80 Users Manual 01Cover_page (80E)

VF80 to the manual a5212862-ddad-4de8-a004-d44570433bef

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation